Cooper SMP 16, SMP 16/CP, SMP 16/SG, SMP 4 User Manual
Cooper SMP 16/CP is a powerful, flexible and easy-to-use gateway for substation automation. It seamlessly integrates with other devices and systems, regardless of their manufacturer. With its wide range of features and capabilities, Cooper SMP 16/CP gateway can be used for a variety of applications, including data acquisition, control, protection and monitoring. It provides a cost-effective and efficient way to improve the reliability, efficiency and security of your substation.
Advertisement
Advertisement
User Manual
SMP Gateway
Copyright Cooper Power Systems © 2008, hardware, software and manual
The information in this document is subject to change without notice.
Cooper Power Systems
Energy Automation Solutions
730 Commerciale St.
Suite 200
Saint-Jean-Chrysostome (Quebec)
Canada
G6Z 2C5
Phone: +1.418.834.0009
Fax: +1.514.227.5256
Email: [email protected]
Web Site: http://www.cybectec.com
GUI-00316-00001 T, version 18
Contents
1
2
3
4
Welcome
1
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
Principles of Operation
7
2.1
2.1.1
2.1.2
Introducing the SMP Gateway in the Automation System ...................... 8
2.1.3
SMP Gateway Internals ........................................................................... 9
2.1.4
Communications Components ................................................................ 9
2.2
2.2.1
The Transparent SMP Gateway ............................................................ 11
2.2.2
Using the SMP Gateway as a Protocol Translator ................................ 13
2.2.3
Using the SMP Gateway as a Data Concentrator or Device
2.2.4
Using the SMP Gateway as a Communications Processor .................... 15
2.2.5
2.2.6
Securing the Substation ......................................................................... 17
SMP Tools Overview
19
SMP Manager
21
4.1
Starting SMP Manager and Logging On ............................................................. 21
4.2
4.3
4.4
Information Provided by the SMP Gateway Icon ................................................ 23
4.5
4.5.1
Adding or Removing a Column ............................................................ 25
SMP Gateway User Manual
•
i
ii
•
5
6
4.5.2
Changing the Position of a Column ...................................................... 25
Configuring the SMP Gateway
27
5.1
5.1.1
Creating a Master Protocol Instance from a Template .......................... 29
5.1.2
Creating a Master Protocol Instance Manually ..................................... 30
5.1.3
Configuring the Master Protocol General Settings................................ 30
5.2
5.2.1
Adding Data Points from a Protocol Template ..................................... 33
5.3
Creating a Template from a Master Protocol Instance ........................................ 33
5.4
5.5
5.5.1
Configuring the Serial Port Interfaces ................................................... 34
5.5.2
Configuring the Operation of the Serial Ports ....................................... 36
5.5.3
Configuring TCP/IP Master Connections ............................................. 37
5.6
Associating a Master Protocol Instance with a Communications Link ............... 37
5.7
5.7.1
Validating and Saving the Configuration .............................................. 38
5.7.2
Sending the Configuration to the SMP Gateway .................................. 39
5.7.3
Retrieving an SMP Gateway Configuration File ................................... 40
5.8
5.8.1
Selecting Cells and Lines ...................................................................... 40
5.8.2
5.8.3
Copying a Value to a Group of Cells .................................................... 41
5.8.4
Resequencing a Group of Lines ............................................................ 42
5.8.5
5.8.6
5.8.7
Searching and Replacing Points in a Configuration .............................. 44
Viewing the SMP Log Files
47
6.1
6.2
6.2.1
Searching in SMP Log .......................................................................... 48
6.2.2
6.2.3
6.2.4
Viewing Multiple Log Folders at Once ................................................. 49
6.2.5
Changing How Time Information is Displayed .................................... 49
SMP Gateway User Manual
7
8
9
Viewing Protocol Exchanges in Real Time
51
7.1
7.2
7.2.1
Searching in SMP Trace ........................................................................ 52
7.2.2
7.2.3
Recording Live Traces .......................................................................... 53
7.2.4
Saving all the Scrolled Information ....................................................... 54
7.2.5
Changing How Time Information is Displayed .................................... 54
Viewing Communications Statistics in Real Time
55
8.1
8.2
8.2.1
8.2.2
8.2.3
Changing How Time Information is Displayed .................................... 57
Using a Web Browser to View Data in Real Time
59
9.1
Connecting to the SMP Gateway’s Website ........................................................ 59
9.2
Navigating Through the SMP Gateway’s Website .............................................. 59
9.3
9.4
Acknowledging Data Point Value Changes ........................................................ 61
10
Connecting the SMP Gateway to a Control Center
63
10.1
10.2
10.3
10.4
10.5
10.5.1
Setting up a TCP/IP Slave Connection .................................................. 66
10.6
Associating a Slave Protocol Instance with a Communications Link ................. 66
10.7
10.8
11
Using the Web Server’s Commissioning Tool
69
11.1
Configuring an SMP Gateway for Commissioning ............................................. 69
11.2
11.3
SMP Gateway User Manual
•
iii
iv
•
11.3.1
The Commissioning Tab ....................................................................... 72
11.3.2
11.3.3
Un-Forcing an Input Point ..................................................................... 73
11.3.4
Performing a Control Operation ............................................................ 74
11.3.5
Closing the Commissioning Session ..................................................... 75
11.4
12
Interconnecting SMP Gateways
77
12.1
12.2
12.2.1
Updating the Interconnections Master’s Data Point List ....................... 83
12.3
Verifying the Interconnection Between the SMP Gateways ............................... 84
13
Security
85
13.1
13.2
Substation Network Security Considerations ...................................................... 86
13.2.1
Setting Up a Secure Substation LAN .................................................... 86
13.2.2
Using SMP Tools through a Substation LAN Firewall ......................... 87
13.3
Extending the SMP Gateway Security Model ..................................................... 89
13.4
Managing the Security Database of One or More SMP Gateways ...................... 89
13.4.1
13.4.2
Accessing the Login Information Dialog Box ....................................... 90
13.4.3
Displaying an Appropriate Use Banner at Login .................................. 90
13.4.4
Defining your Authentication Policy .................................................... 91
13.4.5
Groups and Privileges ........................................................................... 94
13.4.6
Editing User Groups and Privileges ...................................................... 94
13.4.7
Managing User Groups and Privileges .................................................. 96
13.4.8
Validating and Saving the Security Database ....................................... 97
13.4.9
Sending the Security Database to One or More SMP Gateways ........... 98
13.4.10
Retrieving the Security Database of an SMP Gateway ......................... 99
13.4.11
Removing the Security Database from One or More
13.4.12
Unlocking a User Account .................................................................. 100
13.4.13
Viewing the Security Log ................................................................... 101
13.5
13.5.1
Detecting an integrity check failure .................................................... 102
13.5.2
Recovering from an integrity failure ................................................... 102
13.6
SMP Gateway User Manual
13.6.1
Manually Setting Up a VPN Connection ............................................ 103
13.7
13.7.1
Creating the Firewall in SMP Config .................................................. 104
13.7.2
Setting General Parameters ................................................................. 105
13.7.3
Setting Firewall Rules ......................................................................... 105
13.8
Locking Incoming RAS and Passthrough Connections ..................................... 106
13.8.1
Locking or Unlocking All Incoming RAS Dialup Connections .......... 107
13.8.2
Locking or Unlocking a Passthrough Connection ............................... 108
14
Using Passthrough Connections
109
14.1
14.2
14.2.1
Defining SMP Gateway Passthrough Settings .................................... 111
14.2.2
Installing a Loopback Cable, if Necessary .......................................... 112
14.2.3
Setting Up a List of Applications and Loopback Connections ............ 113
14.3
14.4
14.5
14.6
Using the Trace of Passthrough Connection Events .......................................... 117
14.7
Changing How Time Information is Displayed in SMP Connect ..................... 118
15
Retrieving Event Files From Devices
119
15.1
15.2
Configuring Master Protocols for Event File Retrieval ..................................... 121
15.3
Retrieving files from another SMP Gateway ..................................................... 122
16
Using the Annunciator Interface
125
16.1
16.2
16.2.1
Configuring Alarm Inputs ................................................................... 129
16.2.2
Setting Up the Alarms Page ................................................................ 131
16.2.3
Setting Up the Blocked Page ............................................................... 134
16.2.4
Setting Up the History Page ................................................................ 135
16.2.5
Setting Up the System State Page ....................................................... 137
16.2.6
Creating a User-Defined Readings Page ............................................. 140
16.2.7
Selecting the Pages to Display ............................................................ 147
16.2.8
Selecting the Page Displayed at Startup .............................................. 148
SMP Gateway User Manual
•
v
vi
•
16.2.9
Changing How Time Information is Displayed .................................. 148
16.2.10
Setting Up an Alarm Buzzer ............................................................... 149
16.2.11
Temporarily Deactivating the Annunciator ......................................... 149
16.3
16.3.1
Connecting the Touch Screen to the SMP Gateway............................ 149
16.3.2
Setting Up a Screen Saver using SMP Config .................................... 150
16.4
Uploading the Configuration to the SMP Gateway ........................................... 150
16.5
16.6
Using the SMP Gateway’s Annunciator ............................................................ 151
16.6.1
Navigating Through the Different Pages ............................................. 151
16.6.2
Managing Alarms ................................................................................ 152
16.6.3
Blocking Alarm Inputs ........................................................................ 154
16.6.4
Using the Single Alarm Display .......................................................... 155
16.6.5
Using the History Log ......................................................................... 155
16.6.6
Monitoring System Status ................................................................... 157
16.6.7
Performing Control Operations From a Readings Page ...................... 159
16.6.8
Using the Screen Saver ....................................................................... 160
17
The SMP Gateway’s Automation Functions
163
17.1
The SMP Gateway Automation Functions Module ........................................... 163
17.1.1
Adding an Automation Functions Instance ......................................... 164
17.1.2
Defining an Automation Function ....................................................... 165
17.1.3
Understanding Automation Functions Settings ................................... 168
17.1.4
Using the Logic Processor................................................................... 168
17.2
17.2.1
The CoDeSys Development Environment .......................................... 176
17.2.2
Using CoDeSys to Create SMP Gateway Automation Scripts ............ 177
18
Using Syslog with an SMP Gateway
178
18.1
19
Redundancy
181
19.1
19.1.1
19.1.2
Giving Priority to an SMP Gateway of the Group .............................. 182
19.2
Grouping 2 SMP Gateways for Redundancy ..................................................... 183
19.2.1
Setting Up a Redundancy Group Using SMP Manager ...................... 183
SMP Gateway User Manual
19.2.2
SMP Manager’s Redundancy Column ................................................ 187
19.3
19.3.1
Forcing an Active SMP Gateway to Fall On Standby ......................... 188
19.3.2
Additional Failover Conditions ........................................................... 189
19.3.3
Modifying the Redundancy Settings of an Existing Group ................. 189
19.3.4
Ungrouping SMP Gateways ................................................................ 189
19.3.5
Testing and Validating the Configuration ........................................... 189
19.3.6
Monitoring Redundancy Status ........................................................... 190
19.3.7
Testing a Redundant Network ............................................................. 190
19.4
19.5
Teaming NICs for Network Fault Tolerance (SMP 16 Only) ........................... 192
20
Setting Up the SNMP Server
193
20.1
20.2
21
Time Adjustment
195
21.1
21.2
21.3
21.3.1
About GPS, IRIG-B and SNTP ........................................................... 197
21.3.2
Configuring the SMP 16 GPS Clock Option ....................................... 198
21.3.3
Using IRIG-B for Internal Clock’s Adjustment .................................. 198
21.3.4
Setting Up the SMP Gateway as an SNTP Client ............................... 199
21.3.5
Using a SCADA Protocol’s Time Adjustment Feature ....................... 200
21.4
Using the SMP Gateway as a Time Source ....................................................... 200
21.4.1
Configuring IRIG-B Time Distribution .............................................. 201
21.4.2
Setting Up the SMP Gateway to Act as an SNTP Server .................... 201
21.4.3
Adjusting Devices Clocks Using Master Protocols ............................. 202
22
SMP Tools Remote Access to the SMP Gateway
203
22.1
22.1.1
Setting Up a Dial-Up (Modem) Connection ....................................... 203
22.1.2
Setting Up a Direct Serial Connection ................................................ 206
22.2
22.2.1
Setting Up a Dial-Up (Modem) Connection ....................................... 209
22.2.2
Setting Up a Direct Serial Connection ................................................ 211
SMP Gateway User Manual
•
vii
viii
•
23
Using a Dial-Up Connection for DNP3 or IEC 60870-5-101
215
23.1
Specifying which serial ports have modems ..................................................... 216
23.2
23.3
23.4
Adding a modem pool master connection ......................................................... 219
23.5
24
Updating SMP Gateway’s Software and Tools
221
24.1
Software Architecture of the SMP Gateway ..................................................... 221
24.2
24.3
24.3.1
Updating the SMP Gateway Firmware ............................................... 222
24.3.2
Updating the SMP Gateway Application ............................................ 224
24.3.3
Updating the Configuration File ......................................................... 225
25
Activating a New License
226
25.1
26
Miscellaneous SMP Tool Features
229
26.1
26.1.1
Modifying SMP Manager’s Settings ................................................... 229
26.2
26.3
26.4
26.4.1
Setting Up SMP Loader ...................................................................... 235
26.4.2
26.4.3
Transferring Files to the SMP Gateway .............................................. 237
26.4.4
26.4.5
Updating Bootstraps Under Unusual Circumstances .......................... 239
27
Telnet-Based Functions
241
27.1
27.2
27.2.1
27.2.2
27.2.3
27.2.4
SMP Gateway User Manual
27.3
27.4
27.4.1
27.4.2
27.4.3
27.5
28
Troubleshooting
247
28.1.1
Getting Additional Help ...................................................................... 247
28.1.2
Creating an SMP Gateway Report File ............................................... 248
28.1.3
Viewing an SMP Gateway Report File ............................................... 249
28.2
28.2.1
No Configuration File ......................................................................... 249
28.2.2
28.2.3
Critical Components Missing .............................................................. 251
28.3
28.3.1
28.3.2
28.3.3
28.4
28.5
28.6
SMP Gateway User Manual
•
ix
Figures
Figure 1
Figure 2
Figure 3
Figure 4
Figure 5
Figure 6
Figure 7
Figure 8
Figure 9
The SMP Gateway as a communications processor ................................................... 16
Figure 10
Figure 11
Figure 12
SMP Gateway User Manual
•
xi
1 Welcome
1.1
Congratulations on acquiring your new SMP Gateway! You now have unlimited connectivity for all the equipment in your substation.
In this manual, we will show you how to use the SMP Gateway to integrate existing and new
RTUs, IEDs, PLCs and control centers into a single modern, homogeneous substation automation system.
You will learn how to set up your SMP Gateway as a:
‰ Protocol Translator – The SMP Gateway translates standard or proprietary device protocols to control center protocols such as DNP3, TEJAS, IEC-60870-5-101/103/104 or IEC-61850
(UCA 2.0).
‰ Data Concentrator – The SMP Gateway collects the data from all connected devices, regardless of protocol, and makes it available to control centers using LAN, WAN, modem or serial connections.
‰ Terminal Server
– The SMP Gateway supports centralized maintenance, monitoring and control of all devices by using the passthrough communications mode.
‰ Substation Communications Gateway – The advanced capabilities of the SMP Gateway make it the ideal choice for any substation automation project.
SMP Gateway Models
There are currently 3 SMP Gateway models:
‰ The SMP 4 has 4 ports. It comes in a compact and economical format that allows it to be installed directly within relay protection enclosures. There is also an optional internal modem available, which allows the SMP 4 to communicate with a SCADA or device via a dialup connection.
‰ The SMP 16 , which can be mounted in a 19-inch rack, comes in two versions, both of which have the same basic characteristics:
‰ The SMP 16/CP is a gateway that offers 16 RS-232/422/485 universal serial ports,
2 Ethernet ports and an integrated modem.
SMP Gateway User Manual
•
1
1.2
‰ The
SMP 16/SG
has, in addition, expansion slots where accessories and options can be added to make it an ideal communications gateway for all your automation projects.
‰ Both versions can also be equipped with the PM option, a new 1.1 GHz Pentium-M processor that improves the gateway's speed tenfold. This is ideal for high-capacity application or complex automation schemes.
The manual applies to all models, and differences are indicated where applicable. Refer to your
SMP Gateway installation guide for a detailed description of your particular SMP Gateway model.
Related Documentation
This manual provides you with the basic information you need to get started with your
SMP Gateway. To reduce paper use, we have included the following related documentation on the
CD-ROM you received with the product. Should you want printed documents, you can order them from Cooper Power Systems using reference number P-DPRN-0102.
Your Documentation folder contains the following related documents:
‰ SMP 4-20 SMP 8-40 Installation Guide, GUI-00316-00027 T .
This document gives you detailed instructions on installing and setting up the SMP 4-20 or
SMP 8-40.
‰ SMP 4 Installation Guide, GUI-00316-00026 T .
This document gives you detailed instructions on installing and setting up the SMP 4.
‰ SMP 16 Installation Guide, GUI-00316-00032 T .
This document gives you detailed instructions on installing and setting up the SMP 16/CP or the SMP 16/SG.
‰ SIOM Adding Serial Ports to Your SMP, AUT-00123-00432 T .
This document describes how to add serial ports to an SMP 4-20 or SMP 8-40.
‰ SMP 16 GPS Clock Option Installation Guide AUT-00316-0047-T.
This document describes how to install the wiring and setup the software if you have the GPS clock option for the SMP 16.
‰ Master Protocol Common Concepts.
This document describes the concepts and settings common to the protocols used by most substation devices. Separate documents describe the protocol-specific settings.
‰ SMP 4 Diagnostics Reference Guide, GUI-00316-00040 T .
This document takes you through the steps required to run diagnostic tests on the SMP 4.
‰ SMP 16 Diagnostics Reference Guide, GUI-00316-00036 T .
This document takes you through the steps required to run diagnostic tests on the SMP 16.
‰ SMP 4-20 SMP 8-40 Diagnostics Reference Guide, GUI-00316-00024 T .
This document takes you through the steps required to run diagnostic tests on the SMP 4-20 or SMP 8-40.
2
•
SMP Gateway User Manual
1.3
1.4
Getting Assistance with Cybectec Products
If you have any questions regarding the performance, application, testing or repair of this or any other component of the Cybectec product line, do not hesitate to contact us. Our staff will be happy to assist you.
Cybectec Technical Support
Cooper Power Systems
Energy Automation Solutions
730 Commerciale Street, Suite 200
Saint-Jean-Chrysostome, Quebec
Canada G6Z 2C5
Email: [email protected]
Phone: +1.418.834.0009
Fax: +1.514.227.5256
You can reach us between 8 a.m. and 5 p.m. EST. For emergency service on weekends and holidays, simply leave your name and phone number on our pager at +1.418.260.6000. We will get back to you as soon as possible.
Getting Started
When you receive your SMP Gateway, you have to go through several steps before you can perform the tasks described in this document. Namely, you have to do the following:
‰ Unpack the SMP Gateway.
‰ Install the SMP Gateway.
‰ Set-up the SMP Gateway.
‰ Install the PC software.
‰ Make the SMP Tools aware of your new SMP Gateway.
‰ Load the SMP Gateway firmware.
All of these steps are explained in detail in the following documents:
‰ SMP 4-20 SMP 8-40 Installation Guide, GUI-00316-00027 T
‰ SMP 4 Installation Guide, GUI-00316-00026 T.
‰ SMP 16 Installation Guide, GUI-00316-00032 T.
Make sure you have performed all the steps described in those documents before proceeding with the material explained in the present document.
SMP Gateway User Manual
•
3
1.5
4
•
Document Overview
Once you have performed all the steps explained in your SMP Gateway installation guide, you are ready to perform the following tasks, as described in this user manual:
‰ Configure your SMP Gateway so that it can communicate with your devices:
‰ Define the hardware.
‰ Configure the master protocol instances that will communicate with your substation devices.
‰
‰
‰
‰
Configure the data points.
Set-up the communications links between the SMP Gateway and the substation devices.
Associate master protocol instances with communications links.
Validate, activate and test your configuration.
‰ View the following information in real time:
‰
‰
‰
‰
The SMP Gateway log files.
Protocol exchanges.
Communications statistics.
Data points, using a Web browser.
‰ Configure your SMP Gateway so that it can communicate with one or more control centers:
‰
‰
‰
Configure a slave protocol instance for each control center.
Have each control center subscribe to the data points.
‰ Associate slave protocol instances with communications links.
You will also become familiar with the following SMP Gateway features:
‰
‰
‰
‰
‰
‰
‰
‰
‰
‰
Security.
Passthrough connections.
DFR and event file processing.
Automation functions.
Annunciator..
Redundancy.
SNMP exporting.
Time synchronization.
SMP Gateway access through a direct or dial-up connection.
‰
SMP Gateway access through a dial-up connection for DNP3 and IEC 60870-5-101 protocols.
Commissioning tool.
SMP Gateway User Manual
You will also learn how to update the SMP Gateway software and tools, and to troubleshoot any problems you may encounter with your SMP Gateway.
SMP Gateway User Manual
•
5
2 Principles of Operation
2.1
2.1.1
Electrical power utilities face a number of challenges when attempting to automate their substations. They have legacy devices that they want to continue using. They want to integrate new devices. They may want to add one or more control centers. They may want to use a local
HMI in order to keep a close watch on all events that occur in the substation.
There are a number of problems to contend with: connectivity, protocol incompatibilities, interoperability problems, security considerations, logistics for migration, downtime, and not the least of which, total project cost.
The SMP Gateway has been specifically designed to address all these issues. It is the ideal product to ensure a smooth, safe and cost-effective approach to substation modernization. Indeed, you can use a step-by-step approach. You decide which steps to take, in which order, and when.
Logical Architecture
The SMP Gateway is designed to meet all the requirements for power substation automation. It has an open architecture that allows you to easily add new protocols, devices, local area networks, wide area networks, and control centers.
In this section, we will describe the logical architecture of the SMP Gateway and we will see how it implements all the functions required of a substation gateway.
Masters and Slaves
A typical automation system consists of a SCADA system, located in a control center, which is connected to devices located in the substation. The SCADA regularly polls the devices in order to retrieve device readings and statuses. The operator uses the SCADA system to perform control functions on selected devices.
Since it is the control system that initiates data acquisition and control, it is considered to be the master system. Since the substation device responds to data acquisition and control requests, it is considered the slave system.
SMP Gateway User Manual
•
7
SCADA
MASTER
SLAVE
2.1.2
DEVICE
Figure 1 Master and slave systems
Introducing the SMP Gateway in the Automation System
When an SMP Gateway is introduced in the automation system, it has to act as both a slave and a master. The SCADA system interrogates the gateway as if it were a substation device. The gateway is thus a slave to the SCADA. However, since the gateway is connected to the substation devices, it must also be able to perform the functions of a master, such as polling for data and sending control requests.
SCADA
MASTER
SLAVE
MASTER
SLAVE
8
•
DEVICE
Figure 2 The SMP Gateway as a Master-and-slave system
SMP Gateway User Manual
2.1.3 SMP Gateway Internals
The SMP Gateway's internal architecture is based on a series of software components called protocol components . Slave protocol components implement all the functions necessary to process requests received from a SCADA or control center. Master protocol components implement the functions necessary to poll devices and send control requests. Cooper Power
Systems provides components for most standard protocols, such as DNP3, MODBUS, IEC-60870-
5-101/103/104 and IEC 61850, as well as a large number of proprietary protocols such as SEL,
ABB TEN BYTE, Motorola MDAC, and more.
The master protocol component polls the device and stores the data that it retrieves in an internal database, called the Real-Time Data Exchange (RTDX) . The RTDX is much more than a simple data store. Besides storing the current value of all the device data points, it also stores the different types of information than can be provided by a substation device, such as the quality and timestamp of the data. It also stores information such as device tags used for control functions.
SCADA
SLAVE
PROTOCOL
REAL-TIME
DATA EXCHANGE
MASTER
PROTOCOL
DEVICE
Figure 3 The SMP Gateway real-time data exchange
2.1.4 Communications Components
SMP Gateway protocol components process the messages exchanged among the control centers and the devices. However, these messages can be transmitted using various communications methods. For instance, the MODBUS protocol can be used on a TCP/IP network or on an RS-232 serial link.
SMP Gateway User Manual
•
9
SMP Gateway communications components implement all the functions required to communicate with a device or control center using a variety of communications technologies. Cooper Power
Systems provides communications components for asynchronous serial ports, RS-232, RS-422,
RS-485, TCP/IP and modems.
SCADA
SLAVE
COMMUNICATION
COMPONENT
SLAVE
PROTOCOL
COMPONENT
REAL-TIME
DATA EXCHANGE
MASTER
PROTOCOL
COMPONENT
MASTER
COMMUNICATION
COMPONENT
2.2
10
•
DEVICE
Figure 4 SMP Gateway communications components
Configuring the SMP Gateway
The SMP Gateway configuration process consists of establishing the relationships among the internal components, and providing the specific settings for each of these components. This task is
SMP Gateway User Manual
2.2.1
greatly simplified by Cybectec
SMP Tools
family of software programs. These Windows-based programs help you configure your SMP Gateway and identify and correct any problems.
The configuration process consists of the following steps:
‰ Identifying the SMP Gateway model and the installed options.
‰ Creating a master protocol component for each device that is connected to the SMP Gateway.
‰ Defining all the data points in the device.
‰ Defining the communications link to be used to connect the device to the SMP Gateway.
‰ Creating a slave protocol component for each SCADA or control center.
‰ Defining the data points that the SMP Gateway will report to the SCADA.
‰ Defining the communications link to be used to connect to the SCADA.
‰ Adding a firewall and optionally a security server that supports corporate network users.
Thus, the configuration settings define the functions that the SMP Gateway performs. These settings are stored in a file that you load onto the gateway. The flexibility of the SMP Gateway architecture is the basis of Cooper Power Systems’ step-by-step substation modernization strategy.
In the following sections, we will show you how you can configure the SMP Gateway to perform all the functions required of a substation gateway.
The Transparent SMP Gateway
As a first step in a substation automation project, you can easily set up the SMP Gateway to act as a transparent interface between the SCADA and a substation device. The following diagram illustrates how you can do this using the MODBUS protocol.
SMP Gateway User Manual
•
11
SCADA
RS-232
CONNECTION
MODBUS
SLAVE
REAL-TIME
DATA EXCHANGE
MODBUS
MASTER
RS-232
CONNECTION
12
•
DEVICE
Figure 5 The transparent SMP Gateway
In this configuration, the master component polls the device and stores the values in the RTDX.
The slave component processes the SCADA polling requests and sends the values provided by the device.
There is not much use for a transparent gateway. However, it contains much more than the components that we described previously. Simply by adding the SMP Gateway to the substation, you now have access to the following advanced functions:
‰ Centralized automation functions, using the built-in Automation functions or the IEC 61131-3
Soft PLC logic processor.
‰ Real-time data display, using the built-in web server.
‰ Transparent access to devices, using the passthrough server, for local or remote IED maintenance.
SMP Gateway User Manual
‰ SNMP support to monitor communications status.
‰ Sophisticated HMI, interactive diagrams, data logging and reporting, using Cooper Power
Systems’ Visual Substation software.
‰ Sophisticated Windows tools for remote or local maintenance.
‰ A sophisticated security server to support corporate network users.
Even more important, the transparent SMP Gateway is the first step in integrating new substation devices to your existing SCADA and automation system.
SCADA
INTERNET
EXPLORER
VISUAL
SUBSTATION
HMI
PASSTHRU
RS-232
CONNECTION
MODBUS
SLAVE
WEB
SERVER
REAL-TIME
DATA EXCHANGE
VISUAL
SUBSTATION
MODBUS
MASTER
RS-232
CONNECTION
IEC 1131
SOFT PLC
STATS LOGS
SNMP
TRACES
MAINTENANCE
TOOLS
2.2.2
DEVICE
Figure 6 Additional SMP Gateway functions
Using the SMP Gateway as a Protocol Translator
As we saw in the last section, the SMP Gateway is transparent when the master and slave protocols are the same. When you configure different master and slave protocols, the
SMP Gateway becomes a protocol translator.
Since you can independently configure the communications links for the master and slave components, you can easily use the SMP Gateway to integrate legacy serial devices in a modern network environment. Similarly, you can connect modern IEDs to a legacy control center.
SMP Gateway User Manual
•
13
SCADA
TCP/IP
CONNECTION
DNP3
SLAVE
REAL-TIME
DATA EXCHANGE
MODBUS
MASTER
RS-232
CONNECTION
2.2.3
DEVICE
Figure 7 The SMP Gateway protocol translator
Using the SMP Gateway as a Data Concentrator or Device
Multiplexer
The SMP Gateway architecture is designed to simultaneously support any number of master components. Each component has its own communications link and its own protocol. All the data retrieved from the devices is stored in the RTDX, where it becomes available to the SCADA.
Using the SMP Gateway as a data concentrator is a simple matter of configuration, and it provides a highly efficient means of adding new devices to an existing automation system. The SCADA system has no knowledge of the new devices; it only sees new data points.
14
•
SMP Gateway User Manual
SCADA
TCP/IP
CONNECTION
MODBUS
MASTER
RS-232
CONNECTION
DNP3
SLAVE
REAL-TIME
DATA EXCHANGE
SEL
MASTER
RS-232
CONNECTION
2.2.4
DEVICE DEVICE
Figure 8 The SMP Gateway data concentrator
Using the SMP Gateway as a Communications Processor
The SMP Gateway architecture supports any number of slave components. Each component has its own communications link, and all the device data can be sent to any number of SCADA and control centers, each with its own protocol. Using the SMP Gateway, sending data to a new control center is a simple matter of configuration.
SMP Gateway User Manual
•
15
SCADA
MAINTENANCE
CENTER
RS-232
CONNECTION
MODBUS
SLAVE
REAL-TIME
DATA EXCHANGE
TCP/IP
CONNECTION
DNP3
SLAVE
MODBUS
MASTER
RS-232
CONNECTION
2.2.5
DEVICE
Figure 9 The SMP Gateway as a communications processor
Putting it all Together
The SMP Gateway’s sophisticated architecture allows it to integrate existing and new RTUs,
IEDs, PLCs and control centers into a single homogeneous substation automation system. It provides you with a complete solution for automating new substations and modernizing legacy systems.
16
•
SMP Gateway User Manual
SCADA SCADA
INTERNET
EXPLORER
VISUAL
SUBSTATION
HMI
TOUCH
SCREEN
PASSTHRU
RS-232
CONNECTION
MODBUS
SLAVE
MODBUS
MASTER
RS-232
CONNECTION
TCP/IP
CONNECTION
DNP3
SLAVE
WEB
SERVER
REAL-TIME
DATA EXCHANGE
VISUAL
SUBSTATION
IEC 1131
SOFT PLC
SEL
MASTER
RS-232
CONNECTION
STATS LOGS
LOCAL HMI
SNMP
TRACES
2.2.6
DEVICE DEVICE
MAINTENANCE
TOOLS
Figure 10 The substation SMP Gateway
Securing the Substation
Widespread data access within the SMP Gateway can become an important security risk if it is compromised, but it can also become a security asset. This is why SMP Gateways are ready for
NERC CIP-002-1 to CIP-009-1 Cyber Security Standards. The gateway provides a single point of access to all substation data. The security features of the SMP Gateway allow you to protect the
substation devices (see Figure 11).
If you activate the security features within your substation SMP Gateway, you will be able to:
‰ comply with authentication and authorization policies;
‰ set up a firewall to protect from substation LAN security breaches;
‰ monitor and lock out remote connections.
File integrity check is also periodically performed on the SMP Gateway files.
The access inside the firewall protection has additional layers of protection, so that only a few users of your choice will have the possibility to modify parameters inside the substation.
SMP Gateway User Manual
•
17
18
•
SCADA
INTERNET EXPLORER
VISUAL
SUBSTATION
HMI
SCADA
FIREWALL PROTECTION
HARD-WIRE
CONNECTION
RS-232
CONNECTION
SPECIFIC IP
ADDRESS OPEN PORT
TCP/IP
CONNECTION
MODBUS
SLAVE
DNP3
SLAVE
VPN
WEB
SERVER
PASSTHRU
MODBUS
MASTER
RS-232
CONNECTION
HARD-WIRE
CONNECTION
HARD-WIRE
CONNECTION
VPN
VPN
VISUAL
SUBSTATION
REAL-TIME
DATA EXCHANGE
SEL
MASTER
IEC 1131
SOFT PLC
RS-232
CONNECTION
STATS
SNMP
LOGS TRACES
DEVICE DEVICE MAINTENANCE
TOOLS
Figure 11 The SMP Gateway with a firewall
In the following chapters, we will learn how to configure the SMP Gateway to perform these functions.
SMP Gateway User Manual
3 SMP Tools Overview
To assist you with the tasks you will want to perform with the SMP Gateway s in your organization, we have provided you with our suite of SMP Tools .
The SMP Tools are Microsoft Windows-based programs that make it easy for you to configure the SMP Gateway and perform maintenance functions. They run on a PC, are simple to use, and provide advanced features that allow you to rapidly configure all the devices and communications links in your substation. They can be used locally or remotely through a LAN, WAN or VPN.
When security is activated, users must log in before they can use any function.
The Cybectec SMP Tools include the following applications:
‰ SMP Manager
Manages all the SMP Gateways in your organization. It displays the state of each gateway, manages their configuration files and local security database, allows you to group two gateways together to achieve redundancy, and is used to invoke the configuration and maintenance tools for any gateway to which it is connected. From SMP Manager, you can also start Internet Explorer to view the data points, logs and traces in real time, and you can start a Telnet session in order to set-up certain advanced features such as dial-up access or
IRIG-B signal output type.
‰ SMP Config
Used to configure the SMP Gateway. It has a spreadsheet-like grid that you use to specify the devices and control centers connected to the gateway, their protocols, their communications links and their data points. Advanced editing functions make it easy for you to enter the data points. Template editing allows you to pre-define standard devices with standard data points, thereby reducing labor intensity and the possibility of errors.
‰ 61850 Config
Used to configure the IEC 61850 and UCA 2.0 protocols on the SMP Gateway.
‰ SMP Log
Used to browse through and manage the log files maintained by the SMP Gateway. All significant events are logged, including local and remote control events, system failures, special protocol events, and so on.
‰ SMP Stats
Used to browse through and manage a large variety of dynamically updated statistics, ranging from full communications statistics for each link to the processor load for each protocol component.
SMP Gateway User Manual
•
19
‰ SMP Trace
Used to browse through the real-time traces generated by the SMP Gateway. SMP Trace can display detailed traces of all protocol and communications link activity. Traces are displayed in both hexadecimal and application protocol format. The tracing functions are similar to those usually provided by protocol analyzers, with the notable exception that they can be used remotely at any time on any SMP Gateway and that they decode information at the application level. As such, they constitute an excellent commissioning or debugging tool.
‰ SMP Connect
Used to establish passthrough connections with any IED connected to an SMP Gateway, for the purpose of doing remote configuration and maintenance of IEDs using manufacturerprovided software.
‰ SMP Loader
Used with the SMP 4-20 and SMP 8-40 to load new versions of most of the SMP Gateway firmware components, and with the SMP 4, SMP 16/CP and SMP 16/SG, to load the secondary bootstrap program. Refer to Appendix A and to your SMP Gateway installation guide for details on using SMP Loader .
‰ Event Translator .
Used to convert Cybectec event files to the COMTRADE format.
The next chapter will discuss how to create a list of SMP Gateways with SMP Manager , and will then explain how to do a complete configuration of your SMP Gateway using SMP Config .
20
•
SMP Gateway User Manual
4 SMP Manager
4.1
SMP Manager
is the doorway to your SMP Gateways. It runs on your PC, as do all the tools you launch through SMP Manager . You are already familiar with the application, since you added your new gateway to the list of SMP Gateways managed by SMP Manager when you installed your SMP Gateway. This section goes over a few of the points that were covered in your
SMP Gateway installation guide, and provides additional information.
Starting SMP Manager and Logging On
To start SMP Manager :
‰ On the Windows taskbar, click Start .
‰ Point to Programs , then Cybectec , and then SMP Tools .
‰ In the SMP Tools menu, click SMP Manager .
The
SMP Manager
main screen appears, followed by the
Login Information
dialog box.
‰ If security has already been configured, enter valid credentials.
‰ Click OK to close the dialog box.
SMP Gateway User Manual
•
21
4.2 Main Window
The following figure shows a typical SMP Manager window.
4.3
22
•
As illustrated, the main window displays information such as:
‰ The list of SMP Gateways and the tools that are currently running for each gateway in the list.
‰ The current status of each SMP Gateway in the list (started, failed, safe mode, max safe mode, on standby, and various intermediate states).
‰ The SMP Gateway model: SMP 4-20, SMP 8-40, SMP 4, SMP 16/CP or SMP 16/SG.
‰ The IP address and redundancy status of any SMP Gateways you have grouped together for the purpose of redundancy. This information is available only if your license supports redundancy. This column is not available by default.
‰ Whether the SMP Gateway's built-in firewall is active and whether VPN is connected or disconnected.
This information is available only if your version of the SMP Gateway software supports the
SMP Gateway’s security features. The firewall information is not available by default
You can choose which columns you want to display and their order of appearance, with a right click on the column header.
Adding an SMP Gateway
Creating a list of the SMP Gateways you want to monitor is easy. Proceed as follows for each gateway you want to add to the list:
‰ From SMP Manager ’s File menu, click Add SMP Gateway to add your SMP Gateway to the list.
The Gateway Properties dialog box appears.
SMP Gateway User Manual
4.4
‰ Type the name by which you want to identify your SMP Gateway in Gateway Name . The
Configuration file is the file that will be opened by default in SMP Config. If you change its name afterwards through the File menu, you must come back to this dialog box and change the name in the Configuration File text box, so it opens the right file at startup.
‰ In the First Address box, type the IP address of the first Ethernet port. You can also type the address of the second Ethernet port in the Second Address box, although it is not necessary to do so.
‰ If the SMP Gateway cannot be directly accessed through the network, but requires a dialup connection, select the The gateway is connected over a remote dial-up checkbox to prevent
SMP Manager from polling the gateway for its status.
‰ Click Add .
The SMP Gateway gets added to the list, and SMP Manager automatically detects the gateway model and in the case of an SMP 4, whether an internal modem is installed.
Information Provided by the SMP Gateway
Icon
The SMP Gateway icon, which is displayed beside each gateway name, provides additional information about the SMP Gateway.
The following table gives the meaning of each icon:
Icon Description
A device with two red LEDs.
SMP Manager
is unable to establish a connection with the gateway.
A device with flashing yellow and green LEDs.
SMP Manager
is connected to the gateway.
A blank page.
A file (configuration file, new software, etc.) has been modified and will be activated
SMP Gateway User Manual
•
23
4.5
24
•
Icon Description when the gateway is restarted.
A lined page and a pencil.
A report is currently in progress.
The report file provides detailed information about the gateway. You should, therefore, send an SMP Gateway report file with any request for technical support.
A device, flashing yellow and green LEDs and a yellow telephone.
SMP Manager is connected to the gateway via remote dialup.
A device and a telephone, grayed.
The gateway is configured for remote dialup but not currently connected to
SMP
Manager
.
A device, red LEDs and a yellow telephone.
SMP Manager is unable to establish a connection with the gateway over the remote dialup connection.
Customizing the Display
You can customize the display in the SMP Manager window to suit your needs. You can choose which columns you want to display, and the order in which you want them to appear.
Column Description
Gateway The list of SMP Gateways and, if you request it, the tools that are currently running for each gateway in the list.
IP Address The IP address of any SMP Gateways you have grouped together in SMP Manager. This column is not available by default.
Status
Platform
Firewall
VPN
Group
Security
The current status of each SMP Gateway in the list (started, failed, safe mode, max safe mode, on standby, and various intermediate states).
The SMP Gateway model: SMP 4-20, SMP 8-40, SMP 4, SMP 16/CP or SMP 16/SG.
Whether the SMP Gateway's built-in firewall is active. This information is available only if your version of the SMP Gateway software supports the SMP Gateway’s security features.
Indicates if the SMP Gateway is connected to SMP Manager using VPN or not.
This column shows the virtual address given to the redundancy group. If the address is modified, the new address will appear beside the old one, separated by an arrow. Upon the next reboot, the device will be grouped under the new address only.
This column shows whether the security is activated or not, if it is global or local, and how recent it is.
SMP Gateway User Manual
4.5.1
4.5.2
Adding or Removing a Column
To toggle between displaying a column and removing it from the display:
‰ Right-click any column heading.
‰ In the shortcut menu, locate the column you are interested in.
Put or remove a checkmark to add or remove the column to or from the display.
Changing the Position of a Column
To change the order of a column in the display:
‰ Click the column heading of the column you want to relocate.
‰ Drag the heading to the target location.
SMP Gateway User Manual
•
25
5 Configuring the
SMP Gateway
As we saw under “Principles of Operation
” , you have to configure the SMP Gateway before you can use it. For this, you use
SMP Config
to define the characteristics of your SMP Gateway and the functions it has to perform. The configuration is stored in a file that is then loaded onto the
SMP, where it is stored in non-volatile flash memory.
Using SMP Config, you will perform the following configuration steps:
‰ For an SMP 4-20, an SMP 8-40 or an SMP 16/SG, define the hardware options installed.
‰ Create a master protocol instance for each device to be supported.
‰ Define each data point on each device.
‰ Configure the communications link to be used to connect to each device.
‰ Create a slave protocol instance for each SCADA or control center.
‰ Configure the communications link to be used to connect to the SCADA.
‰ Map the device data points to SCADA data points.
You will then use
SMP Manager
to send the configuration file to the SMP.
Note: There can only be one instance of SMP Config running at any given time .
If you launch the tool for a given SMP Gateway and then launch it again for a second SMP Gateway, SMP Config will prompt you to save any changes you have made, close the configuration file of the first gateway, and then open the configuration file of the second gateway.
To create a configuration file for your SMP Gateway, proceed as follows:
‰ Start SMP Manager.
‰ In SMP Manager’s application window, select your SMP Gateway.
SMP Gateway User Manual
•
27
‰ In the
Tools
menu, click
SMP Config
to start the application.
5.1
28
•
The SMP Config display includes 3 panes. The left pane is a tree structure of all the configuration topics. The top right pane displays the settings for the topic you have selected in the left pane. The bottom right pane appears when your request that the configuration be validated; it displays error and warning messages.
The gateway name is the name you assigned when you added the SMP Gateway in SMP
Manager . The configuration file name on the title bar was also assigned when you added the
SMP Gateway in SMP Manager .
If you open the Master Protocols and Slave Protocols branches, you will see that the tree structure offers you a fixed set of protocols. These are the protocols currently supported by your product license.
Creating Master Protocol Instances
You need to add a master protocol instance for each device you want to access with your
SMP Gateway (see Figure 2). Even if a number of devices share a multidrop link, each of them
requires its own master protocol instance. Each device is a slave, so the gateway acts as a master when communicating with the device, which is why it requires a master protocol instance.
There are two ways to add the master protocol instance:
‰ You can use a template, which eases the task of configuring the master protocol instance, by automatically entering the points list for the device. SMP Config provides templates for a number of common substation devices.
SMP Gateway User Manual
‰ If no template is available, you will need to enter the points list. If you are configuring a number of devices of the same type, you can save the first device configuration as a template that you will then use to configure the other devices.
Once you have added a master protocol instance and entered its data points (manually or via a template), you can click a particular data point type in the left pane and see the list of data points and their settings in the right pane, as shown next.
5.1.1 Creating a Master Protocol Instance from a Template
To add a master protocol instance from a template:
‰ In the left pane, open the Master Protocols branch, to display the list of master protocols provided under your product license.
‰ In the left pane, click the protocol for which you want to add an instance.
The list of all defined master protocol instances appears in the right pane.
‰ In the Tools menu, click New Instance From Template.
‰ Choose the appropriate template, and click Open .
‰ In the dialog box, enter:
‰
‰
The name of the new instance.
The device prefix
.
The device prefix is a string that identifies the device and is used as a prefix for all of its data point names. The prefix ensures that every name in the system is unique. An
explanation of the usage of prefixes is provided under “Configuring the Master Protocol
, in the next sections.
The new instance appears in the left pane. If you open its tree structure and click the various physical data point types, all the data points supported by the device will be displayed in the right pane.
SMP Gateway User Manual
•
29
5.1.2
5.1.3
Creating a Master Protocol Instance Manually
To add a master protocol instance manually:
‰ In the left pane, open the Master Protocols branch, to display the list of master protocols provided under your product license.
‰ In the left pane, click the protocol for which you want to add an instance.
The list of all defined master protocol instances appears in the right pane.
‰ In the right pane, type the name of the new instance at the end of the list of names, and press the Tab key on your keyboard.
The new protocol instance is added in the left pane, under the protocol type you had selected. If you expand its tree branch and click an item, the corresponding protocol settings will be displayed in the right pane. Note that if you click a physical data point type in the left pane, the right pane will display an empty row since you will have to add the physical data points manually.
Configuring the Master Protocol General Settings
All master protocol components share common settings that define how they interact with a device. The following procedure describes how to enter these settings. If you created the protocol instance from a template, the general settings have been defined for you. However, you should verify the settings to make sure they match your device configuration, and you should familiarize yourself with the naming conventions discussed in this section.
‰ In the left pane, click General to display the list of general settings for the selected protocol.
‰ In the right pane, type a Device Prefix .
The string you enter will be used as a prefix for all the I/O point names of the device. It is mandatory for each instance of a protocol. It is used to distinguish data point names that are on the same device type, but on multiple physical devices. The device prefix ensures that every data point name in the system is unique. Device prefixes are described in the following
section, “Adding Data Points from a Protocol Template”.
Device prefix and naming conventions
A typical substation automation project requires the configuration of thousands of data points.
You can significantly reduce the effort by carefully planning how to name devices and data points.
Cybectec tools provide additional functionality if the names of data points are based on some type of convention. For our engineering projects, we use a naming convention such as the following:
‰ A data source name, such as the substation name: MAPLE , CEDAR .
‰ A voltage level: 220 or 25 .
‰ A device name: L1 to indicate a line, T1 to indicate a transformer, F1 to indicate a feeder,
BUS for a bus bar.
‰ A signal name: V_phsA_mag to indicate the phase A voltage magnitude, A_phsA_mag to indicate the phase A current magnitude, Pos_st to indicate the status of a breaker or a line switch.
30
•
SMP Gateway User Manual
5.1.3.1
5.2
With such a convention, a data point called CEDAR_220_BUS_V_phsA_mag clearly indicates the voltage magnitude of phase A on the 220 kV bus of the CEDAR substation. A data point called MAPLE_025_F1_Pos_st indicates the status of the breaker switch of feeder 1 at the MAPLE substation.
‰ Still in the
General
settings, enter the scanning settings.
For instance, to configure a MODBUS master protocol, you would provide settings such as the following:
‰
‰
‰
A Device Address , typically 1.
A MODBUS Type , typically RTU Serial .
A Scan Interval , typically 1000 ms.
A complete description of all settings is provided in the document entitled Master Protocol
Common Concepts . Protocol-specific settings are described in individual documents, such as
DNP3 Master Protocol .
Accessing Protocol-Specific Documentation
There are Cooper Power Systems documents available, to which you can refer for details on the settings of the currently supported protocols.
To access the documents, proceed as follows:
‰ Click Start , on the Windows taskbar.
‰ Point to All Programs, then Cybectec, then SMP Tools, and then Documentation.
‰ In the Documentation menu, click Protocols.
The list of available documents is displayed in an explorer window.
‰ Click the document you want to read.
‰ In the File menu of the explorer window, click Open with Acrobat .
Your Adobe Acrobat program starts up and displays the document in a window.
Configuring the Data Points
Once you have provided the general settings of the protocol component, you then enter all the data points on the device. If you created the protocol instance from a template, all the data points have already been added; however, we suggest you read this section for your information.
Protocol components typically support physical and logical data points of the following types:
‰ Analog inputs
‰ Binary inputs
‰ Analog outputs
SMP Gateway User Manual
•
31
32
•
‰ Binary outputs
A physical data point represents a real-life value, implemented on an external device. You need to identify all the device data points, either manually or using a device template.
A logical data point
is a value managed by the SMP Gateway. These data points are built-in and cannot be modified, but they can be disabled.
Analog inputs are measured values. The system keeps 2 values for each analog measurement obtained: a raw value, which is usually the value retrieved from the device, and a calculated value expressed in engineering units, obtained using the following standard formula:
Engineering value = Raw Value X Scaling Factor + Offset
Binary inputs represent the state of a data point. The state is either ON or OFF.
Analog and binary outputs are typically initiated by a slave component, which sends a control request originating from a control center, to the master component involved.
When you create a data point, you specify the type of data and you indicate how the
SMP Gateway will retrieve it. General properties such as name, type and units, are independent of the type of device or protocol used. Protocol-specific properties indicate how the SMP Gateway will retrieve the data from the device. Each protocol uses its particular form of addressing, such as index values or data offsets.
For example, to add a data point for a MODBUS device:
‰ Click the appropriate branch under the protocol instance.
‰ In the right pane, type the name of the data point and fill in all the appropriate settings.
For instance, to define an analog input you would provide the following settings:
‰
‰
‰
‰
‰
‰
‰ The name of the data point, such as BUS_VA. SMP Config will automatically add the device prefix to this name, thereby generating the full name of the data point.
The input source, such as Input Registers .
The input format, such as Unsigned Integer .
The input size, such as 16 or 32 bits.
The word offset in the MODBUS device memory.
The scaling information required to convert the raw value to engineering units.
The Units and Description strings used to provide meaningful data displays.
A complete description of all settings is provided in the document entitled Master Protocol
Common Concepts . Protocol-specific settings are described in individual documents, such as
Modicon Modbus Master Protocol . A complete description of system data points can be found in
the section entitled “System Data Points” on page 231 of this manual.
To access the various protocol documents:
‰ Click Start , on the Windows taskbar.
‰ Point to Programs, then Cybectec, then SMP Tools, and then Documentation.
‰ In the Documentation menu, click Protocols.
SMP Gateway User Manual
5.2.1
5.3
Adding Data Points from a Protocol Template
Protocol templates can also be used to add points to a protocol component. For instance, you could use a template to add the data points provided by an optional device feature. You can do this by retrieving the data points from a protocol template.
To do this:
‰ In the left pane, click the protocol instance to which you want to add the data points.
‰ In the Tools menu, click New Points from Template.
A standard Windows “Open” dialog box appears.
‰ In the Templates folder for the protocol type you selected, choose the “.tpl” file you want to use, and click Open .
A dialog box appears, prompting you for the optional prefix and suffix to be added to every new data point name. The upper portion of the dialog box provides information about the open template file, while the lower portion shows warning and error messages.
‰ Specify a prefix and a suffix, if applicable.
The new data points now appear in their respective categories under the selected protocol instance, and their names contain the specified prefix and suffix.
Note that the prefix and suffix are not applied to logical data points, and that the logical data points are reset every time you add data points from a protocol template. You should, therefore, configure these data points once you have completed the list of physical data points.
Creating a Template from a Master Protocol
Instance
You can create a template of a master protocol instance, which you can retrieve later in order to quickly generate new protocol instances.
To create the template:
‰ In the File menu, click Save As Template .
‰ Choose the Templates folder in which you want to store the template, type a significant name for the template file, and click Save .
Note that a template file can contain only one protocol instance. So if you want to create templates for several protocol instances, create a new configuration for each one and save individual templates.
SMP Gateway User Manual
•
33
5.4 Duplicating a Master Protocol Instance
Once you have created a master protocol instance and configured its data points, you may want to generate one or more additional instances with the same general and data point settings. A quick way to accomplish this is by duplicating the master protocol instance.
To do this:
‰ In the left pane, click the protocol instance you want to duplicate.
‰ In the Tools menu, click Duplicate .
A dialog box appears, prompting you for the instance name and device prefix, as shown in the following.
5.5
5.5.1
‰ Type the name and prefix of the protocol instance, and click OK .
The new protocol instance now appears in the left pane.
Configuring the Communications Links
A protocol component communicates with a device or control center using one of the following: a serial link, a modem or a TCP/IP network. The configuration of a communications component is completely independent of the protocol used. Before you connect a device to the SMP Gateway, you have to choose and configure its communications links.
Configuring the Serial Port Interfaces
Depending on the options you choose in the hardware configuration, you can configure the
SMP Gateway serial ports to support RS-232, RS-422 or RS-485 communication.
‰ Click
Serial Ports
in the left pane, to display all the available ports.
34
•
SMP Gateway User Manual
‰ For each port, choose the type of interface to be used. Most substation devices typically use either Asynchronous RS-232 or Asynchronous RS-422/485 . If you are using a serial port for a touch screen, select ELO Touchscreen .
Serial port naming conventions
‰ The SMP 16 provides 16 serial ports, identified as A01 through A16 . It also has a modem port labeled Modem , which has a “Modem Asynchronous” interface. The SMP 16/SG can also house up to 2 additional serial ports boards, which will be identified as B01 to B16 and D01 to D16.
‰ The SMP 4 and SMP 4-20 both provide 4 built-in serial ports. These ports are identified as
COM1 Board A through COM4 Board A .
The SMP 4 also provides a built-in console serial port. This port is identified as Built-in
Console 1 Board A . This feature allows you to use the Console port as a standard serial port.
If the SMP 4 has an internal modem, then it provides 3 built-in serial ports and 1 built-in modem port. These ports are also identified as COM1 Board A through COM4 Board A ; however, the
Interface
column in the right pane indicates that the interface for
COM4 Board
A is “Modem Asynchronous”.
‰ The SMP 8-40 provides 4 additional ports named COM1 Board B through COM4 Board B.
The SMP 4-20 and SMP 8-40 SIOM use IPack modules to provide additional ports in groups of 8. The ports in the first group are called IPack_A1 Board A through IPack_A8 Board A .
The ports in the second group are called IPack_B1 Board A through IPack_B8 Board A .
The SMP 8-40 supports two additional groups of ports called IPack_A1 Board B through
IPack_A8 Board B and IPack_B1 Board B to IPack_B8 Board B.
The purpose of each interface is given in the following table:
Interface
Asynchronous RS-232
Description
Use this value to indicate that the serial port is dedicated to establishing a standard asynchronous RS-232 connection.
Asynchronous RS-422/485
Modem Asynchronous
RAS (remote access server)
Use this value to indicate that the serial port is dedicated to establishing an asynchronous RS-422 or RS-485 connection.
This value indicates that the port is used for modem asynchronous communication. The value is automatically assigned to the
Modem
port of an SMP 16 and to the
COM4 Board A
port of an SMP 4 equipped with an internal modem.
Use this value to indicate that the serial port is configured to accept incoming direct serial connections. This type of connection allows you to use the SMP Tools as if you were connected to the SMP Gateway via a normal network connection. By default, the console port is always configured for RAS.
Refer to the SMP 4 Installation Guide, GUI-00316-00026 T , or to the
SMP 16 Installation Guide, GUI-00316-00032 T , for instructions on
setting up a RAS IP address pool. Then refer to “
Erreur ! Résultat incorrect pour une table.
”, page 203, in the present manual, for the
step-by-step installation procedure.
SMP Gateway User Manual
•
35
5.5.2
36
•
Interface
Redundancy
ELO Touchscreen
Radio
Reserved
Description
Constraint for the SMP 4-20 and the SMP 8-40:
An SMP 4-20/SMP 8-40 CPU board can support up to 4 different bit rates for the serial ports located on the front panel. This means that if you specify that the console serial port is configured for RAS, only 3 other bit rates will be available for the remaining 4 serial ports on Board
A and that if all the other Board A serial ports are used, 2 of the 5 serial ports must have the same bit rate. Note that if you set the console serial port to Reserved and you do, in fact, accept incoming direct serial connections on the console serial port as well as on the 4 remaining serial ports, the SMP Gateway application will disable the console port connection. This constraint obviously does not apply to Board B, since it has 4 serial ports and there are 4 bit rates available.
Use this value to indicate that the serial port is reserved for connecting
2 SMP Gateways together as a redundancy group. See “Grouping 2
SMP Gateways for Redundancy”, page 183.
Use this value to indicate that the touch input information of an Elo touch screen will be transmitted to the SMP Gateway using a serial cable, through this serial port.
Use this value to indicate that a radio will be connected to this serial port.
Use this value to indicate that the serial port is reserved for purposes other than those stated previously.
Configuring the Operation of the Serial Ports
Each serial port needs to be configured with the appropriate settings for the connected device.
‰ In the left pane, open the Connections branch to display all the supported connection types.
‰ Click
Asynchronous Serial Ports
to display the list of available ports.
Note that if you choose “Redundancy” as the interface for a serial port, this port will not appear in the list of Asynchronous Serial Ports , as it will be reserved for connecting the
2 SMP Gateways that will be grouped together.
‰ In the right pane, enter the settings for the selected serial ports.
The required settings are usually provided in the device manufacturer’s reference manual:
‰ If you are using RS-485 2-wire communication, choose RS-485. If you are using RS-485
4-wire communication, choose RS-422.
‰
‰
Choose the device communications settings: baud rate, byte size, parity and number of stop bits, such as 9600 baud, 8 bits, no parity, and 1 stop bit.
Choose the device hardware handshaking mode:
‰ If the link type is RS-232, most devices do not use handshaking, so you should keep the default values: RTS to Always On , DTR to Always On , and CTS to Ignore .
‰ If the link type is RS-422, set RTS to Always On . You shouldn’t have any problem if you keep the other default values: DTR to Always On , and CTS to Ignore .
SMP Gateway User Manual
5.5.3
5.6
‰ If the link type is RS-485, set
RTS
to
TX Request
. You shouldn’t have any problem if you keep the other default values: DTR to Always On , and CTS to Ignore .
‰ If you are using RS-422 or RS-485 communication, specify whether or not you will be using line terminators. Refer to your SMP Gateway installation guide for a discussion of termination resistors.
Configuring TCP/IP Master Connections
TCP/IP connections are most often used by slave components to connect to control centers.
However, an increasing number of modern IEDs can be connected to a substation LAN using a
TCP/IP connection.
To configure a TCP/IP connection for a master protocol component:
‰ In the left pane, click Connections , and then on TCP/IP Masters , to display the list of defined connections.
‰ In the right pane, enter the settings for the new TCP/IP connection in an empty row of the grid:
‰
‰
‰
‰
Provide a significant name for the connection
If you are setting up an SMP 8-40, specify whether you will be using board A or board B to interface with the network.
Enter the IP address of the device.
Enter the TCP port number of the device. This information is provided by the device manufacturer.
Associating a Master Protocol Instance with a
Communications Link
In the preceding steps, you configured a master protocol component and a communications component. Now, you have to associate the protocol component with the communications component.
SMP Gateway User Manual
•
37
To associate a master protocol instance with a communications link:
‰ In the left pane, click Connection Usage .
‰ In the right pane, for each master protocol instance under Master Connection Usage , select the checkbox under the appropriate connection instance.
Note: If you have several devices that share a multidrop link, each device must have a different device address.
5.7
5.7.1
Testing the Configuration
Since the configuration of an SMP Gateway offers so many features, SMP Config tests and validates the configuration files before you load it onto the gateway. Before going any further, you should make sure your configuration is error-free. Then, you will send it to the gateway in order to test it in a real-life situation.
Validating and Saving the Configuration
To validate the configuration:
‰ In the Validate menu, click Validate All .
If your configuration contains any errors, messages will appear in the Messages pane, as shown next.
‰ Correct any errors and repeat the process until the configuration is error-free.
38
•
SMP Gateway User Manual
To save the configuration on your computer:
‰ In the File menu, click Save .
Note: You cannot save a configuration file that contains errors. This feature is intended to prevent you from inadvertently loading an invalid configuration file onto an
SMP Gateway. However, you can save your configuration file if the Messages pane displays warnings only.
5.7.2 Sending the Configuration to the SMP Gateway
Once the configuration file is valid, you can send it to the SMP Gateway.
To do this:
‰ Click your SMP Gateway in the SMP Manager application window.
‰ In the
Update
menu, click
Send Configuration File
and choose your configuration file, which has been saved in the location you specified in the Gateway Properties dialog box.
After sending the file to the SMP Gateway, SMP Manager informs you that you have to restart your SMP Gateway for the new application to go into effect.
‰ In the Restart Gateway dialog box, choose Shutdown and Restart to have the
SMP Gateway restart in normal mode.
‰ All restarts are automatically logged in the SMP Gateway’s internal log file. You can type a comment to indicate why you restarted the SMP Gateway. This comment will be added to the event log.
SMP Gateway User Manual
•
39
5.7.3
5.8
5.8.1
The SMP Gateway will go through a series of startup steps, which will be displayed in the
Status column of your SMP Gateway. When startup is complete, if your configuration file is correct, the
Status column will show Started , to indicate that the gateway has started normally.
If your configuration file is incorrect, the Status column will indicate that there is a problem.
There are a number of conditions that can prevent the SMP Gateway from activating a configuration. For instance, the hardware settings may not match the actual physical configuration
of the SMP Gateway. If the gateway does not start up normally, turn to “Troubleshooting”, page
Now that you have a working configuration file with all the master data points, you can use the other SMP Tools and Internet Explorer to see what is going on with the SMP Gateway and with the connected device.
Retrieving an SMP Gateway Configuration File
When you are about to send a configuration file to an SMP Gateway, as described previously, you should first retrieve the old configuration file from the SMP Gateway and store it on your PC. This will not be necessary when you first configure your SMP Gateway, but on subsequent updates, it becomes an important precaution to take.
Proceed as follows:
‰ Select the SMP Gateway in the list.
‰ In the Update menu, click Get Configuration File.
In the Configuration Download dialog box, SMP Manager displays the available configuration files. The current configuration file is identified by the “.par” suffix, while the previous configuration file is identified by “.old”. You might also see files with the extension .txt and .ait.
‰ Choose the .old file, and click the
OK
button.
‰ In the Save As dialog box, specify the name and path where the configuration file is to be stored. The name of the configuration file on the SMP Gateway is used as the default name.
Working with SMP Config
There are many time-saving features you can use to enter data in an SMP Config grid. These features are presented next.
Selecting Cells and Lines
To select one or several cells:
‰ Click the single cell you wish to select.
‰ To select several cells, hold down the CTRL key while clicking the cells.
‰ To select part of a column or part of a row, click the first cell, hold down SHIFT and click the last cell you wish to select.
40
•
SMP Gateway User Manual
5.8.2
To select a column or a row:
‰ Click the header of the line you want to select.
‰ To select several rows or columns, hold down the CTRL key while clicking their header.
‰ To select a group of rows or columns in a sequential order, select the header of the first one, hold down the SHIFT key and select the last one.
Duplicating a Line
Proceed as follows to duplicate a line:
‰ Click the header of the line you want to duplicate.
‰ In the Edit menu, click Duplicate Line .
The line is duplicated after the last line in the display.
In the following example, we clicked on a line and clicked the Duplicate Line command twice, so the line appears twice at the bottom of the list.
5.8.3 Copying a Value to a Group of Cells
The Change Selection command of the Edit menu allows you to copy a value from a particular cell, to one or more lines selected within the same column.
To copy a value to one or more selected cells:
‰ Click the cell to which you want to copy a value.
If you are selecting more than one cell, use the CTRL key or the SHIFT key on your keyboard, as per standard Windows procedure.
‰ In the Edit menu, click Select Cells .
This makes the cells turn gray, as shown next.
SMP Gateway User Manual
•
41
‰ Click in the cell that contains the value you want to copy. In the example, we clicked in the
CI_01 Scale cell.
‰ In the
Edit
menu, click
Change Selection
.
The value is copied to the selected cells.
5.8.4
‰ To deselect the cells, click Clear Selection in the Edit menu.
Note:
If you have selected a group of cells and would like to add other cells to the group:
‰
‰
Select the desired cells using the CTRL key or the SHIFT key on your keyboard, per the standard Windows procedure.
In the
Edit
menu, click
Add to selection
.
Resequencing a Group of Lines
Some settings are sequenced, within a given column. You may decide to remove data points, in which case you will need to remove gaps in the numbering sequence. While resequencing all the entries manually would be quite tedious, the Resequence Selection command of the Edit menu makes it easy.
In the following example, the line with Index no. 7 has been deleted. All subsequent index numbers are now incorrect.
42
•
SMP Gateway User Manual
To correct the problem, proceed as follows:
‰ Click the cell with Index no. 8.
‰ Hold down the SHIFT key of your keyboard and click the last cell in the column.
‰ In the Edit menu, click Select Cells .
The cells turn gray.
‰ In the Edit menu, click Resequence Selection .
A dialog box appears, in which you must specify the starting sequence number (7) and the increment (1). The result is shown next.
‰ To deselect the cells, click Clear Selection in the Edit menu.
5.8.5 Deleting an Item
To delete a line in a grid:
‰ In the right pane, click the header of the line you want to delete.
SMP Gateway User Manual
•
43
5.8.6
‰ Press the Del key on your keyboard, and confirm your intention of deleting the row.
The item disappears from the grid.
To delete a protocol instance:
‰ In the left pane, click the protocol type.
The list of instances of this protocol type appears in the right pane.
‰ In the right pane, click the protocol instance you want to delete.
‰ Press the Del key on your keyboard, and confirm your intention of deleting the row.
The protocol instance disappears from both panes.
To delete a serial port connection:
By their very nature, serial port connections cannot be deleted in the same way. To delete a serial port connection, you have to reserve the corresponding serial port for another usage:
‰ In the left pane, click Serial Ports .
‰ In the right pane, choose Reserved in the Interface list of the serial port.
Using Tooltips
SMP Config provides context tooltips. These tooltips are not displayed on the status bar but rather appear when you point with the mouse to a cell in any grid. This type of tooltip normally displays the editing criteria for the field. For example, it may tell you that the value must fall between 10 and 1000, that the default value is 500 ms, that the field is mandatory if a certain other field is selected, and so on. So they will assist you in editing grids.
Here is a sample tooltip:
5.8.7
5.8.7.1
44
•
This feature is a great time and effort saver, as it spares you from having to wait until you try to validate or save your SMP configuration before finding out that you have a number of errors.
Searching and Replacing Points in a Configuration
Finding Points in a Configuration
To help you find all the references to a point in a configuration, a search function is available in
SMP Config.
To access it:
SMP Gateway User Manual
‰ From the menu Edit, select Find Points or use the shortcut CTRL+F . The Find Points dialog box appears.
‰ In the Find Points dialog box, type the point’s name you are looking for and click the Find button. The results appear in the list below.
‰ Select the point in the list, the application will bring you to the configuration zone of the point.
5.8.7.2 Replacing Points in a Configuration
As illustrated in the precedent section, one point can be used in several situations. If you need to change the naming scheme in your configuration, simply rename the point and the other points created from it will automatically bear the new name.
SMP Gateway User Manual
•
45
6 Viewing the SMP Log Files
The SMP Gateway maintains an internal log of all significant events. Using
SMP Log
, you can select and view the various log files in real time. You can view, print, search and save all or any information in this application.
To start SMP Log and view the SMP log files, proceed as follows:
‰ Click your SMP Gateway in SMP Manager ’s application window.
‰ In the Tools menu, click SMP Log .
SMP Log starts up and displays the list of available logs.
‰ Click a log in the left pane, to view its contents in the right pane.
6.1 Information Provided by SMP Log
The following log files contain information that you will find useful for the configuration and maintenance of your SMP Gateway:
‰ The Startup log records all the steps that the SMP Gateway performed when it last started.
The log indicates which configuration file was loaded and which protocol components were configured and started. You should consult the startup log each time you change the SMP configuration, in order make sure it is a success.
SMP Gateway User Manual
•
47
6.2
6.2.1
6.2.2
6.2.3
48
•
‰ The
Reset
log records the time and reason for each SMP Gateway restart. It indicates whether the reset occurred because of a power failure, a request from the front panel button, a remote request, a watchdog trip, or a fatal hardware or software problem.
‰ The Control log records the steps that the SMP Gateway performed in response to a local or remote control request.
‰ The Security log records all events that concern the security options such as authentication failures, file integrity check and much more.
The other SMP log files contain information that can help you and our technical support team in identifying problems.
SMP Log Features
SMP Log offers you several handy features: searching, printing and saving log file, and having the information displayed in UTC or local time.
Searching in SMP Log
To search in SMP Log:
‰ From the menu View , click Search .
‰ Type a keyword in the text box and click the Search button. All the results will become highlighted; the first one will be lighter.
‰ To go to the next result, click Search Next in the View menu or press F3 .
‰ To go to the previous result, click Search Previous in the View menu or press F3 .
‰ Once you have found, click Cancel Search from the View menu and only the selected result will remain highlighted.
Printing a Log
To print a log:
‰ Select a folder.
‰ From the menu View , click Print .
Saving a Log File
To save a log file:
‰ Select a folder.
‰ From the menu View , select Save As .
SMP Gateway User Manual
6.2.4
6.2.5
‰ Type a name for the file; you can use a different extension such as .csv or .txt.
Viewing Multiple Log Folders at Once
To view multiple log folders at once:
‰ Select folders, using the SHIFT or the CTRL key.
‰ The contents of all folders will be displayed altogether in the right pane, in chronological order.
Changing How Time Information is Displayed
To change how time information is displayed:
‰ From the View menu, click Time Display Options.
‰ From the Time Display Options dialog box, select the type of display from the Time Display
Format drop box: you can choose between the local time (using the PC’s time zone settings) and UTC. Normally, your SMP Gateway’s clock is set in UTC, but you can display the information using the time format you like.
SMP Gateway User Manual
•
49
7 Viewing Protocol
Exchanges in Real Time
7.1
Using SMP Trace , you can view a continuous stream of protocol exchanges between the SMP and the substation devices, or between the SMP Gateway and the control center.
At this stage, however, since you have only configured master protocol instances, you will only see the protocol exchanges that take place between the SMP Gateway and the substation devices.
You can have the information displayed in UTC or local time, highlight the lines that contain specific keywords, and you can clear the current display.
SMP Trace
can generate a continuous log of all the events you are tracing, to a text file on your PC. It can also print or save to a text file, a snapshot of the traced events that occurred since the last time you cleared the display.
To start
SMP Trace
and view the protocol exchanges:
‰ Click your SMP Gateway in the SMP Manager application window.
‰ In the Tools menu, click SMP Trace .
Information Provided by SMP Trace
SMP Trace starts up and displays the list of available traces.
‰ In the left pane, select the item for which you want to view the protocol exchanges.
If you click a folder, everything within the folder is automatically selected.
•
51 SMP Gateway User Manual
7.2
7.2.1
52
•
Using
SMP Trace
, you can view detailed traces of all the system activity. The following traces provide information that you will find useful during the configuration and maintenance of your
SMP Gateway.
‰ Master and Slave Protocol traces display the high-level information exchanges that occur between the SMP Gateway and the other system components to which it is connected. These application-level traces are similar to those provided by a protocol analyzer. They describe the requests sent to a device and the values retrieved. The Slave Protocols folder appears only if slave protocol instances are configured on the SMP Gateway.
‰ Connection traces display the data being exchanged between the SMP and a device. These low-level traces describe, in hexadecimal format, the byte stream sent and received to and from a device.
SMP Trace Features
SMP Trace offers you several handy features: recording traces, searching, printing and saving trace records, and having the information displayed in UTC or local time.
Searching in SMP Trace
‰ From the menu View , click Search . You can also press CTRL+F .
‰ Type a keyword in the text box and click the Search button. All the results will become highlighted, and the first one will be lighter. You can click the Pause/Resume button in the toolbar to stop the screen from scrolling; this command is also available from the View menu.
SMP Gateway User Manual
‰ To go to the next result, click Search Next in the View menu or press F3 .
‰ To go to the previous result, click
Search Previous
in the
View
menu or press F3 .
‰ Once you have found, click Cancel Search from the View menu and only the selected result will remain highlighted.
Note: SMP Trace will keep highlighting matching results as long as you have not canceled the search. You can either deselect the binoculars in the toolbar or stop the search from the View menu.
7.2.2
7.2.3
Printing Traces
To print currently displayed traces:
‰ From the menu
File
, click
.
Recording Live Traces
To record live traces to a file for further analysis:
‰ From the Record menu, select Start or click the red button in the toolbar. The Start recording dialog box appears.
‰ You can also choose to save it inside the SMP Gateway's memory by selecting Record to
SMP . For example, if you have an SMP 4 with a modem on a pole outdoors and you need to save 24 hours worth of activities, long distance costs are most of the time prohibitive. Use this option and connect again 24 hours later to pick up your data.
‰ When you wish to stop the recording, click the red button again or click Stop in the Record menu.
SMP Gateway User Manual
•
53
7.2.4
7.2.5
Saving all the Scrolled Information
To save all the information in SMP Trace that scrolled since opening it:
‰ Select a folder.
‰ From the menu File , select Save As .
‰ Type a name for the file; it will be saved in the .txt format.
Changing How Time Information is Displayed
To change how time information is displayed:
‰ From the View menu, click Time Display Options.
‰ From the Time Display Options dialog box, select the type of display from the Time Display
Format
drop box: you can choose between the local time (using the PC’s time zone settings) and UTC. Normally, your SMP Gateway’s clock is set in UTC, but you can display the information using the time format you like.
54
•
SMP Gateway User Manual
8 Viewing Communications
Statistics in Real Time
The SMP Gateway stores a large number of real-time statistics and internal counters to help you analyze the performance of your SMP Gateway and assist you in troubleshooting your configuration. Using SMP Stats , you can view, in real time, various statistics about the communications links and about the protocol exchanges that take place between the SMP Gateway and the devices or control centers. You can have the information displayed in UTC or local time.
You can also print the statistics, reset them, or save them to a text file for subsequent analysis.
To start SMP Stats and view the statistics:
‰ Select your SMP Gateway in the SMP Manager application window.
‰ In the Tools menu, click SMP Stats .
SMP Stats starts up and displays the list of available statistics.
‰ In the left pane, click the item for which you want to view the statistics.
The statistics are displayed in the right pane and you can see them change dynamically.
SMP Gateway User Manual
•
55
8.1
8.2
8.2.1
Information Provided by SMP Stats
Statistics provide information on the SMP Gateway activity, which can be useful for the configuration and maintenance of the gateway itself. This information is organized as pages and folders. A folder does not contain any statistics: it is a place holder for statistics pages.
When you open SMP Stats, its displays the following folders:
‰ The Connections folder regroups counters and statistics pages about the performance of the
SMP Gateway’s communications components:
‰ The Network (TCPIP) folder contains the list of all the network connections you defined under Connections , with SMP Config . Each connection has its own statistics page.
‰ The Serial (Asynchronous) folder contains the list of all the serial connections. As in the
Network folder, there is a statistics page for each connection.
‰ The Modem Pool folder contains the list of any modem pools and modems you may have defined with SMP Config . The statistics found in these folders provide an easy way to monitor the communications status of the SMP Gateway. For example, you can look at the Receive counter and Transmit counter values to determine whether the gateway is exchanging data with a connected device or control center.
Note : The Modem Pool folder is visible only for the SMP 16, which has an integrated modem, and for an SMP 4 purchased with the modem support option. Furthermore, a modem pool must be configured on the
SMP Gateway.
‰ The Master Protocols and Slave Protocols folders contain counters and statistics about each instance of a protocol component. Each protocol component contains protocol-specific items that describe the messages exchanged with a device or control center. (The Slave Protocols folder is missing, in the previous example, because we have to define slave protocol components first.)
‰ The System folder contains counters and statistics about the operation of the SMP Gateway hardware and software.
SMP Stats Features
SMP Stats offers you several handy features: resetting statistics, printing them, refreshing them, and changing how time is displayed.
Resetting Statistics
You can reset certain statistics, such as global RTDX or web server statistics:
‰ From the menu View , select Reset ; or click the 'X' button; or press CTRL+X.
56
•
SMP Gateway User Manual
8.2.2
8.2.3
Printing Statistics
To print a statistics page:
‰ Select a folder.
‰ From the menu File , click Print .
Changing How Time Information is Displayed
To change the display format of time-specific statistics:
‰ From the View menu, click Time Display Options.
‰ From the Time Display Options dialog box, select the type of display from the Time Display
Format drop box: you can choose between the local time (using the PC’s time zone settings) and UTC. Normally, your SMP Gateway’s clock is set in UTC, but you can display the information using the time format you like.
SMP Gateway User Manual
•
57
9 Using a Web Browser to
View Data in Real Time
The SMP Gateway’s built-in web server (eSMP) provides an easy way to view the log files and statistics using your Internet Explorer web browser. It is also the easiest way to view the analog and binary input and output points in real time.
Note: The eSMP web server requires version 5.0 or a later version of the Microsoft
Internet Explorer web browser. JRE (Java Runtime Environment) must also be installed on your computer. See your SMP Gateway’s installation guide for details.
9.1 Connecting to the SMP Gateway’s Website
Whether it is to view the SMP Gateway’s log files, statistics or data points’ real-time data, you always proceed the same way to connect to the SMP Gateway’s website:
‰ In SMP Manager’s application window, select your SMP Gateway.
‰ From the Tools menu, click Internet Explorer .
Your Internet Explorer web browser will open and connect to the SMP Gateway’s web server.
You may have to wait a few seconds while the web site is loaded and the Java platform is initializing. The website’s home page will eventually appears in your browser.
9.2 Navigating Through the SMP Gateway’s
Website
The SMP Gateway’s website has a number of tabs at the top that allow you to switch between different data views:
‰ The Home tab gives you key information about your SMP Gateway, such as its current state, at what time it started up, and the list of master and slave protocol instances contained in your configuration.
SMP Gateway User Manual
•
59
‰ The
Analog Input
,
Analog Output
,
Binary Input
, and
Binary Output
tabs display the current value of all the SMP Gateway’s data points.
‰ The Logs tab displays the contents of the internal SMP Gateway log files. The data is the same as provided by the SMP Log program.
‰ The
Statistics
tab displays the SMP Gateway’s real-time statistics. The data is the same as provided by the SMP Stats program.
‰ The Commissioning Tool tab is only available when commissioning has been activated on
the SMP Gateway. For more information about this feature, see “Using the Web Server’s
Note: If password security is enabled on your SMP Gateway, everything will be deactivated until you type a valid username and password under eSMP Login .
9.3
60
•
Applying a Filter to a Data Point Display
If you click the Analog Input , Analog Output , Binary Input and Binary Output tabs, you can see all the data points change dynamically on your screen. Since there may be a large number of data points, you can use the Filter function to choose the points you want to display.
SMP Gateway User Manual
To apply a filter:
‰ Select the tab in which you want to filter data points.
‰ In the toolbar, type the filter criterion. It can be the device prefix, or any other text that is common to the data points you want to display.
Note: You may specify up to 5 criteria. For example, if you type smp clock , all data points that contain the words “smp” and “clock” will be displayed; others will be hidden.
‰ Click Apply . Only the data points that contain the filter criterion in any field (such as the point’s name or address) will be displayed. The criterion text is highlighted over the point’s name.
To remove the filter:
‰ Click Cancel . All data points of the selected tab will be displayed.
‰ Each tab preserved its own filter information, allowing you to navigate through the different tabs and specify different filter criteria for each one of them.
9.4 Acknowledging Data Point Value Changes
To help you analyze your data, the web server automatically highlights any data point that changes value, by displaying it on a gray background. The data point stays highlighted until you acknowledge the change of value. You can also have the web server automatically acknowledge value changes after a short delay.
To have Internet Explorer automatically acknowledge the value changes:
‰ Click the appropriate tab to choose the type of data.
‰ Select the Auto Ack.
checkbox located at the top right, above the data point display.
SMP Gateway User Manual
•
61
Data points will now be highlighted when their value changes and the display will return to normal after a short delay.
To manually acknowledge value changes for a particular type of data point:
‰ Click the appropriate tab to choose the type of data.
‰ Make sure that the Auto Ack.
checkbox is cleared.
Data points will now be highlighted when their value changes. They will remain highlighted until you acknowledge the change of value.
To remove all highlighting:
‰ Click Acknowledge , located at the top left above the data point display.
62
•
SMP Gateway User Manual
10 Connecting the
SMP Gateway to a Control
Center
Now that we have seen how to configure master protocol instances, tested the SMP Gateway configuration and viewed the collected data, we will see how to configure a slave protocol instance in order to forward the device data to a SCADA or a control center.
10.1 Creating Slave Protocol Instances
When the SMP Gateway communicates with a control center, it acts as a slave and as such, needs to use a slave protocol. One slave protocol instance is required per control center.
To create a slave protocol instance:
‰ In the left pane of SMP Config, under Slave Protocols , click the protocol for which you want to add an instance.
‰ In the right pane, type the name of the new instance at the end of the list of names, and press the TAB key.
The new protocol instance is added to the left pane, under the protocol branch you had selected. If you expand the protocol branch, SMP Config displays the protocol instance’s default settings.
10.2 Configuring Slave Protocol Instances
The configuration of a slave protocol component is similar to that of a master protocol component.
You choose the protocol, enter the protocol settings, and specify the data points you want forwarded to the SCADA.
The following procedure describes how to configure a slave protocol instance:
SMP Gateway User Manual
•
63
‰ In the left pane, click
General
, to display the list of general settings for the selected slave protocol instance.
‰ In the right pane, enter the protocol settings.
For instance, to configure a DNP3 slave component, you would provide settings such as:
‰
‰
‰
The
Link Address
, which identifies the logical slave device. The address has to match the address used by the control center to communicate with the SMP Gateway.
The Master Link Address , which identifies the control center.
Whether or not you want to support Unsolicited Reporting .
‰ In the left pane, click Default Variations .
‰ In the right pane, specify how you want the data points to be reported. For example, you may want to specify that when there is a change to an analog input point, you want the change reported as a 32-bit value, with the time at which the event took place.
A complete description of the protocol-specific settings is available in individual documents, such as DNP3 Slave Protocol for example .
To access the various protocol documents:
‰ Click Start , on the Windows taskbar.
‰ Point to Programs, then Cybectec, then SMP Tools, and then Documentation.
‰ In the Documentation menu, click Protocols .
10.3 Subscribing to the Master Data Points
Slave protocol instances subscribe to data points in the real-time database. Whenever a master protocol instance writes to the database, the slave instance retrieves the data and applies its own settings to make it compatible with the requirements of the control center protocol.
When you configure a slave protocol component, you select from among all the data points defined by the master protocol components, those data points to which you want to subscribe.
‰ In the left pane, click the slave protocol instance.
‰ In the Tools menu, click Subscribe To .
The Subscribe to Master I/O dialog box appears.
64
•
SMP Gateway User Manual
‰ Click in the Master I/O list, to display the list of data points defined for each master protocol instance.
‰ Choose the data points you want to forward to the control center.
Use the CTRL and SHIFT keys on your keyboard, to extend your selection.
‰ Click the dialog box’s right arrow button.
The data points you choose are added to the Slave I/O list. If, for example, you click a binary input point in the Master I/O list, the point is added to Binary Inputs , in the Slave I/O list.
Normally, a data point that has been transferred to the Slave I/O list disappears from the Master
I/O list. However, if you want the transferred data points to continue being displayed in the
Master I/O list:
‰ Select the Show all enabled points checkbox.
If you change your mind, you can remove a data point from the Slave I/O list as follows:
‰ Click the data point in the Slave I/O list.
‰ Click the dialog box’s left arrow button.
The data point is removed from the Slave I/O list and reinserted in the appropriate data point list for the appropriate master.
SMP Gateway User Manual
•
65
10.4 Configuring the Data Points
The slave component automatically converts the subscribed data points to the appropriate format for the protocol. However, you should make sure the default settings are appropriate and perform any necessary adjustments.
To configure the data points:
‰ In the left pane, click the data point type, to display a list of all the data points and their settings.
‰ There are different settings for each protocol. However, you should at least check the address or index assigned to each data point.
For instance, the following settings are provided for a DNP3 data point:
‰
‰
Each data point is automatically assigned an Index value according to the subscription order. You should ensure that these index values correspond to those expected by the control center.
The Event Class setting groups data points together for subsequent reporting to the control center.
10.5 Configuring the Communications Links
We previously described how to configure a serial communications link for a master protocol component. The procedure is identical for a slave protocol component that uses a serial communications link. However, a slave protocol component typically uses a TCP/IP connection over a LAN, to communicate with the control center. For more information about communications
link configuration, see “Configuring the Communications Links”, page 34.
10.5.1 Setting up a TCP/IP Slave Connection
To configure a TCP/IP connection for a slave protocol component:
‰ In the left pane, under Connections , click TCP/IP Slaves , to display the list of defined connections.
‰ Enter the settings for the new TCP/IP connection in an empty row of the grid:
‰
‰
Specify a significant name for the connection.
Specify the TCP port number to be used.
10.6 Associating a Slave Protocol Instance with a
Communications Link
You now have to identify the communications link which will be used by the slave component to communicate with the control center.
66
•
SMP Gateway User Manual
To associate a slave protocol instance with a communications link:
‰ In the left pane, click Connection usage .
‰ In the right pane, for each slave protocol instance under Slave Connection Usage , select the checkbox under the appropriate connection instance.
10.7 Validating and Activating the Configuration
You can now validate the configuration, save it on your computer, send it to the SMP Gateway, and restart the gateway in order to activate the configuration.
The procedures for doing this were described earlier, in the following sections:
‰
“Validating and Saving the Configuration”, page 38.
‰
“Sending the Configuration to the SMP Gateway”, page 39.
10.8 Testing the Configuration
The SMP Gateway’s configuration now contains a slave component. Slave components are more difficult to test than master components, since they only process data in response to a request from a control center. You may find the following guidelines useful in determining whether the slave component is working properly:
‰ Using SMP Log , check the Startup log, to see whether the slave component was started correctly.
‰ Using SMP Stats, open the Slave Protocols folder and check whether the slave component is processing any data.
‰ Using SMP Stats, open the Connections folder, and check whether any data is being exchanged through the slave’s communications link.
‰ Using SMP Trace , open the Slave Protocols folder, and check whether the component is receiving requests from the control center.
‰ Using SMP Trace , open the Connections folder, and check whether any data is being exchanged through the slave’s communications link.
See the following sections for instructions on how to proceed to view the information:
‰
“ Viewing the SMP Log Files”, page 47.
‰
“ Viewing Protocol Exchanges in Real Time”, page 51.
‰
“ Viewing Communications Statistics in Real Time”, page 55.
‰
“ Using a Web Browser to View Data in Real Time”, page 59.
SMP Gateway User Manual
•
67
A particularly effective way to test a slave protocol instance is to use the SMP Gateway itself to set up a master protocol instance to poll the slave. Using this approach and the SMP Tools, you can easily examine the effect of the various protocol features, such as report by exception.
You can also use the web server’s commissioning tool, as described in the next chapter.
68
•
SMP Gateway User Manual
11 Using the Web Server’s
Commissioning Tool
The SMP Gateway’s built-in web server also provides a commissioning tool that simplifies the engineering effort required for the implementation and the integration of a substation. It is intended to help technician(s) and/or engineer(s) testing the SMP Gateway’s configuration and connectivity with the substation devices and the SCADA.
The web server’s commissioning tool, when configured and activated, is accessible through a web browser, the same way than for viewing data in real-time. It may be enabled by users that have the
System Management privilege, and the operation privilege is required for users that will perform the commissioning operations, which are essentially the following:
‰ Forcing an analog/binary input point to a specific value/state .
This operation allows the validation of the configuration of the SMP Gateway’ slave protocol and the SCADA, by verifying if all the gateway’s data points are correctly mapped on both sides, if minimum/maximum values are correctly handled, etc.
‰ Performing a control operation on an analog/binary output point .
This operation allows the validation of the master protocols’ configuration, by verifying if the
IEDs’ data points are correctly configured in their corresponding masters, if scale and offset settings are correctly specified for each data point, etc.
For example, by forcing each data point of an IED on the SMP Gateway, the technician/engineer can verify that these points are correctly configured, and that transitions/changes for these are correctly handled by the SCADA. On the other side, by executing control operation directly on the
SMP Gateway, instead of performing them on the SCADA, the technician/engineer can validate that the masters’ output points are correctly configured.
11.1 Configuring an SMP Gateway for
Commissioning
If you intend to use the web server’s commissioning tool on your SMP Gateway, you must first enable it in the gateway’s configuration, using SMP Config.
The configuration process is quick and simple, as described here:
‰ In SMP Manager’s application window, select your SMP Gateway.
SMP Gateway User Manual
•
69
‰ From SMP Manager’s
Tools
menu, click
SMP Config
.
‰ In SMP Config, under the System branch, select Web Server . If the Web Server instance has not been created yet, type a name in the blank Name text box, and then click again the Web
Server branch.
‰ Under the
Web Server
instance branch, select the
General
branch.
‰ Select the Commissioning Tool checkbox.
‰ Save the configuration file and send it to the SMP Gateway, using SMP Manager.
‰ Restart the SMP Gateway.
Your SMP Gateway now supports the commissioning feature, which still need to be activated by a user that has the System Management privilege, as described in the following section.
11.2 Activating the Commissioning Feature
Commissioning is not a process that is performed frequently. Done once when the SMP Gateway is deployed in the field, it may be executed later, during maintenance sessions or when new devices are added to the substation’s configuration.
Before letting the user perform commissioning in the field, a user that has the System
Management privilege must activate the commissioning feature. Usually, this user would first make sure that all safety precautions have been taken, that the SMP Gateway is really going through maintenance and that the commissioning process may occur as planned. By activating the feature, the operator in charge of commissioning can then open a commissioning session, and do his work.
To activate the commissioning feature:
‰
Connect to the SMP Gateway’s website, by following the procedure described in section 9.1, page 59.
‰ At the website’s home page, under Commissioning Tool , click the Enable button on the left.
The button’s text will change to Disable , and the button on the right will become available. The operator may now open a commissioning session.
Note: Commissioning will remain active until the left button is clicked again to deactivate it. If the SMP Gateway is restarted, the commissioning feature’s activity state will be persisted: if it was active prior to the restart, it will be active at startup and vice-versa. However, opened sessions are closed.
70
•
SMP Gateway User Manual
11.3 Opening a Commissioning Session
Once the commissioning tool has been activated on the SMP Gateway, any user that has the
Operation privilege can open a commissioning session. Proceed as follows:
‰
Connect to the SMP Gateway’s website, by following the procedure described in section 9.1, page 59.
‰ At the website’s home page, under Commissioning Tool , click the Enable button on the right.
‰ The Enable Commissioning Tool dialog box will appears.
‰ Click Yes .
The button’s text will change to Disable and the Commissioning Tool tab is now available. To use the commissioning tool, simply click the Commissioning Tool tab.
SMP Gateway User Manual
•
71
Note: The commissioning session will remain open as long as the web browser will remain connected to the website, or until the user click again the button on the right. The session is also closed when the SMP Gateway restarts.
11.3.1 The Commissioning Tab
The Commissioning tab looks quite similar to other data points tabs. It is divided in three sections:
‰ The toolbar, which is located at the top ,
Is used for filtering, forcing, control operation and acknowledging purposes. It is an extended version of the toolbar available in other data point tabs, and its content varies in function of the type of the selected data point(s). The following figure shows the toolbar for a binary input point:
‰ The data points list .
Displays the data points of every protocol instance or subsystem of the SMP Gateway. This implies that a data point that is configured in a master protocol and in two slave protocols will be listed three times.
‰ The Messages pane, which is located at the bottom .
Displays a log of all commissioning tool’s operations, statuses and errors.
The data points list’s column are mostly the same that are displayed in the other data points tabs.
The following columns are specific to (or different in) the commissioning tab:
‰ Instance .
The name of the protocol instance or subsystem to which the data point belongs.
‰ Type
.
The data point’s type.
‰ Integer Value .
Usually, the integer value of an analog point is displayed here. In the commissioning tool tab, it is also used for the state of a binary input point, as the
State
column is only used for binary output points.
‰ State .
As stated above, in the commissioning tool tab, this column is used to display the current state of a binary output point.
The various commissioning operations that you can perform are described in the following sections.
72
•
SMP Gateway User Manual
11.3.2 Forcing an Input Point
The most common commissioning operation is to force an input point to a specific value/state, and to verify that the forced value is correctly reported to the SCADA.
To force an input point to a specific value:
‰ In the data points list, select the input point you want to test.
‰ In the commissioning toolbar, specify the forced value/state:
‰ If it is an analog input point, select whether to change the Integer or Float value of the point, using the Force drop-down list, and then type the forced value in the edit box.
‰ If it is a binary input point, select the desired state using the
Force
drop down list.
‰ Still in the commissioning toolbar, click Execute to force the point to the specified value.
‰ In the Messages pane, you should see two new messages: the first one indicates that the force operation has been performed; the second displays the operation’s result.
‰ If the operation was successful, the status column will display Forced (Test) for the data point.
‰ If the operation was successful and both the SMP Gateway and the SCADA are correctly configured, the value/state changes should be reported correctly to the SCADA.
Note: You cannot force the value/state of multiple data points simultaneously.
11.3.3 Un-Forcing an Input Point
To un-force an input point:
‰ In the data points list, select the forced input point.
‰ In the commissioning toolbar, click Unforce .
The point will revert to its current value/state.
To un-force multiple input points simultaneously:
‰ In the data points list, select more than one input points that have been forced.
‰ In the commissioning toolbar, click Unforce All .
‰ In the message box that appears, click Yes to un-force the selected input points.
Note: As stated in the message box, this operation may take a while, depending on the number of input points to un-force. Also, data points included in the selection that have not been forced will not be modified by this operation.
SMP Gateway User Manual
•
73
11.3.4
74
•
You can also un-force all forced data points, by clicking
Unforce All
in the commissioning toolbar.
Performing a Control Operation
When an IED support control operations, it is important to validate that its related output points are correctly configured on both the SCADA and the SMP Gateway sides. Such validation is achieved in two steps, for each output point:
‰ Perform a control operation using the Commissioning Tool, to make sure that the point is correctly configured in the SMP Gateway’s master configuration and that the control result is correctly reported to the SCADA.
‰ Perform a control operation from the SCADA standpoint, as a final validation to make sure that both the SCADA and the SMP Gateway’s slave configurations are correct.
To perform a control operation using the commissioning tool:
‰ In the data points list, select the output point you want to test.
‰ In the commissioning toolbar:
‰ Specify the control type using the Control drop-down list.
Note: If the output point supports select and execute control types, remember to test both control types.
‰ Specify the control value:
‰ If it is an analog output point, select the control value type ( Integer or Float) using the appropriate drop-down list, and then type the control value in the edit box.
‰ If it is a binary output point, select the control state ( Pulse , Open or Close ) using the appropriate drop-down list. If you selected Pulse , type the pulse’s duration, in milliseconds, in the edit box.
‰ Click Execute to perform the control operation.
‰ In the Messages pane, you should see two new messages: the first one indicates that the control operation has been performed; the second displays the operation’s result.
‰ If the operation was successful and both the SMP Gateway and the SCADA are correctly configured, the control operation’s result should be reported correctly up to the SCADA.
Note: You cannot perform control operations on multiple output points simultaneously.
As mentioned earlier in this section, the validation of the output point`s configuration at the
SCADA and in the SMP Gateway is achieved by performing a control operation directly from the
SCADA. Even if it does not involve the commissioning tool, the web browser can still be useful, since it gives access to the SMP Gateway’s log files, including the Control log file.
SMP Gateway User Manual
11.3.5
Various entries are added to the
Control
log when a control operation is executed on the
SMP Gateway, making it an essential resource for this portion of the commissioning task.
To consult the SMP Gateway’s Control log entries in the web browser:
‰ Click the Logs tab.
‰ In the left pane, select the Control log file. All the log entries will appear in the right pane, the oldest entry being displayed at the top.
Closing the Commissioning Session
Even if a commissioning session automatically ends when the web browser is closed, you should close the session manually.
Proceed as follows:
‰ In the web browser, click the Home tab.
‰ Under Commissioning Tool , click the Disable button on the right. The Disable
Commissioning Tool dialog box will appears.
‰ As stated in the dialog box, the commissioning tool will restore all forced points to their acquisition values. Click Yes . The button’s text will change to Enable and the
Commissioning Tool tab will no longer be available, until a new session is opened..
11.4 Deactivating the Commissioning Feature
When commissioning has been performed on the SMP Gateway, the user that has System
Management privilege must deactivate the commissioning feature for obvious safety reasons and to ensure that the system will function as expected.
To deactivate commissioning:
‰ Connect to the SMP Gateway’s website, if you are not already connected, by following the
procedure described in section 9.1, page 59.
‰ At the website’s home page, under Commissioning Tool , click the Disable button on the left.
The button’s text will change to Enable , and the button on the right will become unavailable.
SMP Gateway User Manual
•
75
76
•
SMP Gateway User Manual
12 Interconnecting
SMP Gateways
It is possible to connect two SMP Gateways together, by the means of the Interconnections feature. One advantage of such connectivity is the ability to concentrate data from multiple
SMP Gateways, which is very convenient considering the limited amount of IEDs that can be monitored by a single SMP Gateway. You can also have a setup where the SCADA has only access to one SMP Gateway (for security reasons, for example), while the substation actually contains much more. It would be possible to interconnect two SMP Gateways using another protocol, such as DNP3. However, it would require a considerable configuration effort, which is not the case with Interconnections: data point information and configuration is exchanged between both SMP Gateways.
The Interconnections feature and standard acquisition are based on the same master/slave principles. For Interconnections, the SMP Gateway that provides the data is the slave gateway, and the one that retrieves the data from the other is the master gateway. So, to connect two gateways together, a slave Interconnections instance must be configured in the slave gateway, and a master
Interconnections instance must be configured in the master gateway.
Consider a substation configuration where an IED’s data is retrieved by an SMP Gateway called
Cedar Creek (i.e. the slave gateway). An SMP Gateway called Park Avenue (i.e. the master gateway) needs to get connected to it to make the IED data available to the SCADA. This example is presented in the following illustration:
•
77 SMP Gateway User Manual
SCADA
DNP3 MASTER
PARK AVENUE
CEDAR CREEK
DNP3 SLAVE
INTERCONNECTIONS MASTER
INTERCONNECTIONS SLAVE
MASTER
SLAVE
IEDs
If you move from IEDs up to the SCADA, you will see how the master-slave configuration must be designed for this to work.
The main steps are the following, using SMP Config:
‰ In the device's master (here, the Cedar Creek SMP Gateway), create an Interconnections slave.
‰ Create the Interconnections slave’s connection and associate it with the slave.
‰ In the SCADA’s slave (in this example, the Park Avenue SMP Gateway), create an
Interconnections master.
‰ In the Interconnections master, import the data points from the slave SMP Gateway’s configuration file.
‰ Give the data points a prefix to identify their originating SMP Gateway when you see their readings in the web browser.
‰ Create the master’s connection and associate it with the master.
The following sections explain these steps in details.
12.1 Configuring the Slave SMP Gateway
The first step to interconnect your SMP Gateways is to signify the existence of the master
SMP Gateway in the slave SMP Gateway’s configuration.
Follow these steps:
‰ Open SMP Manager.
78
•
SMP Gateway User Manual
‰ Select the slave SMP Gateway (in the example, the Cedar Creek SMP Gateway).
‰ From the Tools menu, select SMP Config .
‰ Configure the Interconnections slave instance:
‰ In SMP Config, under Slave Protocols , select Interconnections .
‰ In the right pane, under
Name,
type a name for the interconnections slave instance, and then click again the Interconnections branch.
‰ A new branch will appear under Interconnections , named after what was just typed.
Expand it and select the Clients branch.
‰ Under Type , select SMP Gateway . Under Client name, type the client name (you can use the gateway’s name, which in the example is Park Avenue ). This name should be unique for a given type of client.
‰ Clear the Control Enabled checkbox if you do not want to allow control operations through the interconnection. This is required if you do not want to allow SCADA control operations of an IED through the interconnected SMP Gateways.
‰ If you intend to exchange files between the interconnected gateways, you must define a single client for each master gateway connected to the slave gateway. Each client must be defined on a single line, as follows:
‰ Type a Client Name .
‰ Select the Permanent Session checkbox.
‰ Make sure the Maximum Clients parameter is set to 1.
‰ Configure the slave’s connection:
SMP Gateway User Manual
•
79
‰ Collapse the Slave Protocol branch and expand Connections , and then select TCP/IP
Slaves .
‰ Under Name , type the TCP/IP slave's name. For example, you can name it
Interconnections .
‰ Under Port , type 6655 .
Note : Port 6655 is recommended for Interconnections. You can use another port, but make sure you specify the same in the master SMP Gateway’s configuration.
‰ Configure the connection usage:
80
•
‰ Click the Connection Usage branch.
‰ In the right pane, under Slave Connection Usage , you will see the Cedar Creek Slave you created in the previous steps. Scroll to the right and select the checkbox under the
TCP/IP slave's name (in the example, the name is Interconnection ).
‰ Save the configuration file and close SMP Config.
‰
Send the configuration file to the SMP Gateway using SMP Manager (see “Updating the
Configuration File” on page 225).
‰ Restart the SMP Gateway.
SMP Gateway User Manual
Note: As all data points are always made available by an Interconnection slave instance, the slave’s configuration does not need to be updated when a master’s configuration is modified (for example, when a data point is added/removed) or even when a new master is added to the SMP Gateway configuration.
12.2 Configuring the Master SMP Gateway
Now that you have configured the slave SMP Gateway as an Interconnections slave, you will configure the master SMP Gateway as an Interconnections master. Follow these steps:
‰ Open SMP Manager.
‰ Select the master SMP Gateway (in the example, the Park Avenue SMP Gateway).
‰ From the
Tools
menu, select
SMP Config
.
‰ Configure the Interconnections master:
‰ In SMP Config, under Master Protocols , select Interconnections .
‰ In the right pane, under Name , type the slave SMP Gateway's name (in our example,
Cedar Creek ), and then click again the Interconnections branch.
‰ A new branch will appear under Interconnections , named after what was just typed.
Expand it and select the General branch.
‰ In the right pane, under
Device Prefix
, type the prefix that will precede the name of all data points gathered by the Interconnections master, to distinguish them from the data points of other masters that may be configured on the same SMP Gateway. For example, you can type PA_ , where PA stands for P ark A venue, the example’s master
SMP Gateway.
Note: The device prefix should be as short as possible, to respect the maximum length allowed for data points.
‰ Under Client Name , type the same name you specified in the clients list of the
Interconnections slave (in this example, Park Avenue ).
‰ Import the slave SMP Gateway’s data points in the master’s configuration:
‰ From the Tools menu, select Import Points from File .
‰ Select the configuration file for the slave (ex. Cedar Creek SMP Gateway's file would be
Cedar Creek.par
), and then click Open .
‰ The Update Data Points dialog box will appear, listing all the possible data points that can be "interconnected".
SMP Gateway User Manual
•
81
82
•
‰ If some data points are not required in the master SMP Gateway’s configuration, clear the corresponding checkboxes.
‰ Click Update to close this dialog box and to add the points to the configuration.
‰ Configure the master’s connection:
‰ Collapse the
Master Protocol
branch and expand
Connections
, and then select
TCP/IP
Masters .
‰ Under Name , type the TCP/IP master's name. For example, you can name it
Interconnection .
‰ Under IP Address , type the slave SMP Gateway's IP address.
‰ Under Port , type 6655 . If you specified a different port for the Interconnections slave, type this port number.
‰ Configure the connection usage:
‰ Click the Connection Usage branch.
‰ In the right pane, under Master Connection Usage , you will see the Cedar Creek master you created in the previous steps. Scroll to the right and select the checkbox under the TCP/IP master’s name (in the example, the name is Interconnection ).
‰ Save the configuration file and close SMP Config.
‰
Send the configuration file to the SMP Gateway using SMP Manager (see “Updating the
Configuration File” on page 225).
‰ Restart the SMP Gateway.
SMP Gateway User Manual
12.2.1 Updating the Interconnections Master’s Data Point List
When the slave SMP Gateway must monitor new IEDs or more information from actual IEDs, no update is required for the slave SMP Gateway’s Interconnections instance. This is not the case for the master SMP Gateway, but the configuration effort is minimal.
The Interconnections master’s data point list is updated nearly the same way than it is created the first time.
Proceed as follows:
‰ In SMP Config, under Master Protocols , select Interconnections , and then select the master instance.
‰ From the Tools menu, select Import Points from File.
‰ Select the configuration file for the slave SMP Gateway, and then click Open .
‰ The Update Data Points dialog box will appear, listing:
‰ points that are available and that are not actually “interconnected”;
‰ interconnected points are no longer available on the slave SMP Gateway;
‰ interconnected points for which the settings (ex. Scale, offset, etc.) have changed.
‰ Using the checkboxes that are found beside every data points, select the changes you want to apply to the master’s configuration:
‰ Under Points to add , clear the checkboxes of points that you still do not want to be interconnected.
‰ If you want to keep, in the master’s configuration, points that are no longer interconnected, clear the corresponding checkboxes under
Points to remove
. This may happen if a point is temporarily unavailable on the slave SMP Gateway.
‰ If you want the settings of modified interconnected points to remain unchanged, clear the corresponding checkboxes under Points to modify .
‰ Click
Update
to close this dialog box and to add the points to the configuration.
‰ Save the configuration file and close SMP Config.
‰
Send the configuration file to the SMP Gateway using SMP Manager (see “Updating the
Configuration File” on page 225).
‰ Restart the SMP Gateway.
SMP Gateway User Manual
•
83
12.3 Verifying the Interconnection Between the
SMP Gateways
To verify if both SMP Gateways have been properly interconnected:
‰ Launch SMP Manager.
‰ Select the master SMP Gateway (in our previous example, it is the Park Avenue
SMP Gateway).
‰ From the Tools menu, select Internet Explorer . The web browser will connect to the
gateway’s web server (see “Using a Web Browser to View Data in Real Time”, page 59 for
more information about the SMP Gateway’s web features).
‰ If the gateways are correctly interconnected, you will see the slave gateway’s data points in the browser. Each data point will be preceded by the prefix you defined in the master gateway’s configuration. If the IEDs are correctly connected to the slave SMP Gateway, the displayed status of each interconnected data point should be OK.
84
•
SMP Gateway User Manual
13 Security
To derive full benefits from IED integration, substation data must be available to users at enterprise level. However, widespread data access can become an important security risk if it is compromised.
In August 2003, the North American Electric Reliability Council (NERC) issued the NERC
1200 Urgent Action Cyber Security Standard
in order “To reduce risks to the reliability of the bulk electric systems from any compromise of critical cyber assets (computers, software and communications networks) that support those systems.”
The NERC 1200 standard evolved into NERC 1300 , and is now known as NERC CIP-002-1 to
CIP-009-1 Cyber Security Standards
. These standards describe measures that utilities will have to implement, as well as a strict timeline for implementation.
This chapter describes the advanced security features that Cooper Power Systems has implemented since version 4 of the SMP Gateway software and tools, in order to provide utilities with a secure, NERC-compliant, solution to integrate their substation devices. It then takes you through the steps required to customize the security settings to suit the needs of your organization, and provides some general guidelines on setting up a secure substation LAN.
13.1 Meeting NERC CIP Requirements
The Cybectec SMP Gateway helps you meet NERC requirements by providing secure access to substation devices. Its sophisticated software includes the following security features:
‰ Authentication and authorization — Each user is authenticated by the SMP Gateway via a user name and a password. Strong passwords, individual user accounts, user groups, and detailed group permissions protect critical system functions from unauthorized access. All access attempts are logged, and accounts are locked out in the event of multiple failed attempts.
‰ Protection from substation LAN security breaches — The SMP Gateway is protected by a built-in firewall and a built-in VPN server. All TCP/IP ports are blocked, except those required for control center communications and SMP Gateway status monitoring. All communications between the SMP Gateway and the SMP Tools goes through an encrypted
VPN tunnel, even through active passthrough connections.
SMP Gateway User Manual
•
85
‰ Monitoring and locking of remote connections
— Modem and passthrough access is continuously monitored, and can be enabled or disabled by the control center. All accesses are logged and limited to authorized users.
‰ Integrity checking — All SMP Gateway software and firmware components are digitally signed in order to ensure their authenticity and integrity. All executable files are also continuously monitored to prevent execution of unauthorized code.
13.2 Substation Network Security Considerations
13.2.1 Setting Up a Secure Substation LAN
Security, as implemented on the SMP Gateway, is not a substitute for full network security that includes properly configured firewalls. It can be argued that if unauthorized users get as far as trying out the SMP Gateway’s security features, there has already been a security breach at some other level. The goal of the SMP Gateway’s built-in firewall, simply stated, is to minimize the risk of unauthorized access (or network traffic) to internal components on the PCN or SCADA systems.
The substation LAN is a critical part of a utility’s network. To ensure its integrity, it must be isolated as much as possible from the outside world. Ensuring the security of the substation LAN is a complex subject beyond the scope of this document. However, we will provide in this section some general guidelines on setting up a secure substation LAN.
A corporate LAN provides a number of access points to the outside world and is exposed to a variety of threats through its connection to the Internet, external mail servers and file transfers, which may contain viruses. If there is a direct connection between the corporate LAN and substation LANs, the substation is not secure.
A significant improvement is the use of firewalls with the ability to establish a number of demilitarized zones (DMZ) between the enterprise and process control networks. Each DMZ holds a separate "critical" component, such as the data historian, the wireless access point or remote and third party access systems. In effect, the use of a DMZ-capable firewall allows the creation of an intermediate network often referred to as a process information network (PIN).
Creating a DMZ requires that the firewall offer three or more interfaces, rather than the typical public and private interfaces. One of the interfaces is connected to the enterprise and the second, to the PCN/SCADA network; the remaining interfaces are connected to the shared or insecure devices, such as the data historian server or wireless access points.
To isolate the substation LAN, you should take the following precautions:
‰ There should be no email access.
‰ There should be no Internet access.
‰ There should be no direct connection to the corporate LAN.
Furthermore, a redundant path should be provided between the SCADA and the substation, to ensure continued operation in the event of a failure of the corporate WAN. A dedicated communications line is often maintained for this purpose.
86
•
SMP Gateway User Manual
13.2.2
A firewall must be used to isolate the substation LAN from the corporate WAN. The firewall should be configured to block all ports and connections except those that are absolutely necessary for the operation of the substation. For instance, the firewall could be set up to accept traffic between the SCADA and the SMP Gateway only. The firewall could also be configured to limit traffic to a single port, such as that used by a DNP3 communications link.
However, note that such a security policy would prevent the use of the SMP Tools outside the substation.
Using SMP Tools through a Substation LAN Firewall
Cybectec SMP Tools use Microsoft DCOM technology. This technology is designed to be used on a LAN. There are two strategies available to use DCOM through a firewall.
‰ The most secure approach is to establish a VPN (Virtual Private Network) connection between the substation LAN and the client workstations on the corporate LAN. A VPN encapsulates and encrypts network messages before forwarding them to the recipient. You will not need any special setup when installing the SMP Tools . This approach will also secure access by any other tools.
‰ If you cannot use a VPN, you will need to open the necessary ports for DCOM on the firewalls and routers that connect to the corporate LAN.
Here is the list of ports and port ranges that you have to open in the substation LAN firewall, to let a PC on one side of the firewall communicate with an SMP Gateway on the other side of the firewall:
For access when not using VPN, open
Application Port Protocol
FTP server 21 TCP
Telnet
SMP Status
Web server
RPC server and
DCOM
DCOM
23
23
80
135
1024 to 1124
SMP maintenance server
49152
Optional ports, using VPN or not
Application Port
SNMP server 161
SNTP server 123
TCP
UDP
TCP
TCP
TCP
TCP
Protocol
UDP
TCP
SMP Gateway User Manual
•
87
88
•
CoDeSys server
Passthrough server
If using VPN, open
Application
SMP Status
1200
32500
Port
23
TCP
TCP
Protocol
UDP
PPTP (VPN) 1723 TCP and UDP
PPTP (VPN) - GRE
Here is a list of the most commonly used ports for RTU and SCADA communication:
SMP Config Protocol Port
DNP3 20000
IEC 60870-5-104/103
IEC 61850
2404
102
ICCP 102
MODBUS 502
If you configured system folders on your SMP Gateway (see “Defining System Folders”, page
119) and the Windows XP or Windows Server 2003 built-in firewall is enabled on your PC, you
must also open the following ports:
‰ 445 (TCP protocol).
‰ 137, 138 and 139 (UDP protocol), if you are running NETBIOS on your network.
If you are using SNMP, you will also need to open the following ports:
‰ GET and SET commands go through port number 161.
‰ SNMP traps go through port 162.
IMPORTANT:
This configuration will work only if your network DOES NOT use address translation. Check with your network administrator.
SMP Gateway User Manual
13.3 Extending the SMP Gateway Security Model
The SMP Gateway security model is effective « locally »: security settings are stored in the
SMP Gateway, which is also responsible for security processes like authentication, and features such as the firewall and VPN connections.
You may extend the SMP Gateway security model by purchasing Cybectec Security Server, which is part of Cybectec Enterprise Solutions. The Cybectec Security Server provides a global security model, bringing it up to the corporate level and increasing access rights control and flexibility.
Note : Cybectec Security Server’s global security model is out of the scope of this document. For more information, contact your local COOPER Power Systems representative.
The remaining sections of this chapter explain how to configure the SMP Gateway’s local security.
13.4 Managing the Security Database of One or
More SMP Gateways
13.4.1 Getting Started
The following sections will take you through the steps required to customize your SMP Gateway configuration, in order to meet the security policy of your particular organization. To create a secured system, you need to build a database describing allowed users’ name, their password and how many password errors they are allowed to make before being locked out. Every company has its own security criteria and the Cybectec software lets you configure it accordingly. When the database is built and security is turned on, only the users in the list will be allowed to access the gateway.
After setting up the authentication policy, establish a VPN connection to open a connection with the SMP Gateway before installing a firewall. Then, you should set up a firewall. A firewall is a system that blocks all communications from outside the company’s secured network. It protects the system against intrusion, and especially against unwanted access. Once the firewall is in place, you can then allow access for the IP addresses of the SCADA and other such systems to specific
TCP services (ports).
Additionally, the SMP Gateway’s built-in security does not allow an unsigned file in: it has to be signed by Cooper Power Systems to be allowed in the gateway. More information about this
concept is given in section “File certification and integrity checking”, page 102.
Setting up your custom security database involves the following steps:
‰ Defining your authentication policy.
‰ Customizing the various user groups and privileges.
‰ Identifying your users, setting their passwords, and assigning them to user groups.
‰ Validating and saving the security database on your PC.
SMP Gateway User Manual
•
89
13.4.2
‰ Sending your security database to one or more SMP Gateways.
In this section, you will also learn how to perform the following actions:
‰ Retrieving the security database of an SMP Gateway and storing it locally.
‰ Disabling the security database of one or more SMP Gateways.
‰ Unlocking a user account that has been locked out following failed login attempts.
‰ Viewing the security log.
Accessing the Login Information Dialog Box
When you start SMP Manager, you need to login to edit the security. If the Login Information dialog box is not displayed upon startup, here is how you can access it:
‰ In the File menu, select Change Current Login.
‰ The Login Information dialog box appears.
13.4.3
If security is configured on the gateway, logging in will acknowledge your rights from a list of authorized users so you can change settings. It is then highly recommended to check Always show this dialog box at startup , because if you need to change settings you will already be logged in with the rights to do so .
You will automatically be prompted for your credentials whenever you start the application.
If you clear the Always show this dialog box at startup checkbox, you will no longer be prompted at startup. It is more practical if no security is configured, and if it is not planned in a near future.
Displaying an Appropriate Use Banner at Login
NERC CIP standards require the display on the user screen of an appropriate use banner upon each interactive access attempt. SMP Manager allows this in the Login Information dialog box:
‰ Create a text file named Appropriate Use Notice.txt
in the folder
<drive>\Program Files\Cybectec\SMP Tools\Manager\.
‰ In the text file, type the text required by the security policies of your company.
90
•
SMP Gateway User Manual
‰ When you restart SMP Manager, the
Login Information
dialog box will contain the message you just typed in the text file.
The following is an example:
13.4.4 Defining your Authentication Policy
Your authentication policy forms an integral part of your security database. It specifies which login requirements a user has to meet in order to be authenticated. It also specifies whether the user account is to be locked out after a certain number of failed login attempts within a certain number of minutes, and whether the account is to be automatically unlocked after a certain amount of time.
To define your authentication policy for the very first time and assign a name to your security
database
:
‰ Log into SMP Manager
(see “Starting SMP Manager and Logging On”, page 21).
The user name and password you type will automatically be assigned security management privileges. This will allow you to set up your authentication policy and your user groups and privileges.
‰ From SMP Manager’s Security menu, click Edit Local Security Database.
The Authentication Policy dialog box appears, as shown in the next illustration, and you are ready to enter the information.
To modify your authentication policy on subsequent occasions:
‰ Log into
SMP Manager
with an authorized username and password. Only a person with security management privileges can modify the authentication policy.
‰ In the Security menu, select Edit Local Security Database.
The Local Security Database Editor window appears.
SMP Gateway User Manual
•
91
‰ In the Security menu of the Local Security Database Editor window, select Authentication
Policy.
The Authentication Policy dialog box appears.
92
•
The dialog box contains the following elements:
Element
Security Configuration
Description
This section of the dialog box provides a description of the security database, and shows when security database was last modified.
Description Use this box to enter a meaningful description for your security database. This description will appear on the title bar of the
Security Database Editor window.
Modified by This read-only box indicates which
SMP Manager
user last modified the security database.
Password
Date modified This read-only box indicates the date and time when the security database was last modified.
This section of the dialog box specifies the rules that passwords must meet when users set their new passwords..
Minimum password length Specifies the minimum number of characters that a password must contain.
SMP Gateway User Manual
Element
Password must meet complexity requirements
Description
If selected, specifies that a password must contain characters from at least 3 out of the following categories:
‰
‰ alphabetic high caps alphabetic small caps
‰ numeric
‰ special characters.
Account Lock
This section of the dialog box specifies whether a user account is to be locked out from SMP Gateway access if the user fails to log in properly and if so, what are the locking and unlocking parameters.
Enable account lock If you select this checkbox, user accounts will be locked out if the user fails to log in properly. The parameters that follow define the locking and unlocking rules.
Note
: User accounts of the Administrators group may only be locked out if the Enable SMP’s administrator account lock checkbox is also selected (see below).
Maximum number of failed login attempts
Specifies the number of times a user can enter incorrect login information before its account is locked out.
Lock account if max failed logins within
The system will lock out the user account if the user makes the maximum number of failed login attempts within the number of minutes specified here.
Activate automatic account unlock
If selected, indicates that a locked user account will be automatically unlocked by the system after a certain amount of time (see Remove lockout after , below).
Remove lockout after The number of minutes after which a locked user account is automatically unlocked by the system.
Enable SMP’s administrator account lock
If selected, indicates that accounts of the Administrators group are also subject to account locking.
Remove administrator lockout after
The number of minutes after which a locked administrator user account is automatically unlocked by the system.
‰ Modify the authentication policy to suit your needs, and then click OK .
The dialog box closes. The description of your security database appears in the title bar of the
Security Database Editor window, and your authentication policy goes into effect as soon as it is sent to the concerned SMP Gateway(s).
SMP Gateway User Manual
•
93
13.4.5
13.4.6
Groups and Privileges
In the following table, you will find default user groups and privileges. You can change a group's privileges at will; of course, you have to upload the security database to the SMP Gateway afterwards.
Note : If you remove privileges, you must notify the concerned groups or users; otherwise, they will fill up the security log with access denial messages if they keep trying to access the gateway.
Privilege
Security
Management
Description
Update security database: users, groups, and privileges; unlock user accounts.
System Management Update firmware, software, license and components; configure redundancy, firewall,
VPN, RAS, SNTP, and SNNP; access Telnet and FTP servers.
Configuration Update the SMP Gateway’s configuration file.
Diagnostic
Read only Read the SMP Gateway’s configuration file only.
Use the SMP Gateway diagnostics tools.
Device maintenance
Monitoring
Perform direct IED maintenance via passthrough connections.
Monitor and obtain web access to the
SMP Gateway’s central database.
Operation
Remote access
Perform control, tag management and force operation on I/O points.
Obtain remote access via dial-up or VPN.
Groups
Administrators
Administrators
Administrators, technicians.
Administrators, technicians, operators.
Administrators, technicians, operators.
Administrators, protection engineers.
Administrators, technicians, operators, guests.
Administrators, operators.
Administrators, technicians, protection engineers, operators.
Editing User Groups and Privileges
Initially, your security database includes the following elements:
‰ One predefined user, namely an administrator with full privileges.
‰ 5 predefined user groups, each with predefined privileges. Privileges are described in the
Local Security Database Editor
, and in the “Groups and Privileges” section, above.
94
•
SMP Gateway User Manual
You may want to add, delete or rename the user groups and change their privileges to reflect the security policy of your particular organization.
Proceed as follows:
‰ From SMP Manager’s Security menu, click Edit Local Security Database.
The
Local Security Database Editor
window appears. If you click a user group in the left pane, the right pane shows the privileges assigned to this group and gives a description of each privilege.
To rename a group:
‰ In the left pane, select the group to rename.
‰ In the Group menu, select Rename .
‰ Type the new name.
Note: You cannot rename the Administrators group.
To delete a group:
‰ In the left pane, select the group to delete.
‰ In the Group menu, select Delete .
You will be advised if there are any users assigned to the group you are about to delete.
Note: You cannot delete the Administrators group.
To create a new group:
‰ In the Group menu, select New .
‰ Type the name of the new group.
SMP Gateway User Manual
•
95
13.4.7
You cannot create, delete or rename privileges. However, you can choose which predefined privileges you want to assign to a particular group.
To do this:
‰ In the left pane, select the group.
‰ In the right pane, select desired privileges’ checkboxes for this group. Clear other privileges’ checkboxes.
Managing User Groups and Privileges
You will now identify the users that are authorized to access the SMP Gateway, and you will assign each user to one or more groups.
To create a new user:
‰ In the
User
menu, select
New
.
‰ Type the name of the new user.
To rename a user:
‰ In the left pane, select the user to rename.
‰ In the User menu, select Rename .
‰ Type the new user name.
To delete a user:
‰ In the left pane, click the user to delete.
‰ In the User menu, select Delete .
Note: You cannot delete the user called “Administrator”.
To assign a user to one or more user groups:
‰ In the left pane, select the user.
‰ In the right pane, select the groups the user will be assigned to. For example, in the following illustration, user “Matt” is assigned to the “Protection Engineers” group.
96
•
SMP Gateway User Manual
To assign a password to a new user or to change the password of an existing user:
‰ In the left pane, select the user.
‰ In the User menu, select Set Password .
‰ In the Set Password dialog box, type and confirm the new password.
Note: The first time you edit the security database, we strongly suggest that you rename the user called Administrator , since the name is so revealing that it could open the door to a serious security breach. For the same reason, we also recommend that you immediately assign a password to that user.
13.4.8 Validating and Saving the Security Database
Your security database, which includes your authentication policy and the users and groups you have defined, is automatically validated and stored locally on your PC when you close the Local
Security Database Editor
window.
However, if you want to manually validate your security database without closing the window, proceed as follows:
‰ In the Securit y menu, select Check Validity . This will compare your security parameters, such as passwords, with the authentication policy that you defined beforehand.
There are two reasons why you may want to export to a file your security database on your PC:
‰ To create a backup copy.
‰ To transfer your security database from one PC to another.
To manually save the security database to a file on your PC:
‰ In the Security menu, select Send to File .
‰ In the
Send Security to File
dialog box, specify a file name and click
Save
.
SMP Gateway User Manual
•
97
13.4.9
13.4.9.1
Sending the Security Database to One or More
SMP Gateways
Your security database, which includes your authentication policy and the users and groups you have defined, is stored locally on your PC. To activate your security database on one or more
SMP Gateways, you have to send your local security database to the SMP Gateway(s).
Sending the Current Security Database
Proceed as follows to send the security database that is currently active on your PC:
‰ In SMP Manager , select the SMP Gateway(s) to which you want to send the security database.
‰ In the Security menu, select Update SMP Gateway Security Database.
SMP Manager encrypts the information, and then sends the configuration to the
SMP Gateway(s). In the following example, we sent the security database to a single
SMP Gateway. The optional Security column contains the message Local: Up to date to indicate that the local security policy on the Abbey Road gateway matches the one located on the PC.
13.4.9.2 Sending a previously saved security database
Let us suppose that an authorized person in your organization updated the local security database on his or her PC, and sent you a copy of the security database file.
To load this new security database onto one or more SMP Gateways, proceed as follows:
‰ Retrieve the file:
‰
‰
In Security menu of the Local Security Database Editor window, click Get from File .
In the Get Security From File dialog box, specify the file name and click Open .
The retrieved file now becomes the currently active local security database.
‰ Close the Local Security Database Editor window.
‰ In SMP Manager , select the SMP Gateway(s) to which you want to send the security database.
‰ In the Security menu, select Update SMP Gateway Security Database.
98
•
SMP Gateway User Manual
13.4.9.3 The Security column
The Security column displays the status of the local security database that is currently active on the SMP Gateway. It also indicates the status of global security, if enabled for this SMP Gateway.
Here is an explanation of the different values that may be displayed for local security, with a suggestion of what action to take, if any:
‰ Up to Date .
The security database on the SMP Gateway is the same as the security database that is currently active on your PC. This is the normal case.
‰ Older ( date and time ).
You sent a security database to the SMP Gateway, but subsequently modified the local security settings. Therefore, the security database on the SMP Gateway is older than your local security database.
To rectify the situation:
‰
Send your local security database to the SMP Gateway (see “Sending the Current
Security Database”, page 98). The
Status column will now display “Local: Up to Date”.
‰ Newer ( date and time ).
You sent a security database to the SMP Gateway, but someone on another PC subsequently modified his or her own local security database and sent it to the SMP Gateway.
To rectify the situation:
‰ Contact the person who made the changes.
If you approve:
‰ Retrieve the security database from the SMP Gateway in order to update your own local
security database (see “Retrieving the Security Database of an SMP Gateway”, below).
The Status column will now display “Local: Up to Date”.
If the modifications should not have been made:
‰
Send your local security database to the SMP Gateway (see “Sending the Current
Security Database”, page 98). The
Status column will now display “Local: Up to Date”.
‰ n/a
.
The software installed on the SMP Gateway does not support the security features.
13.4.10 Retrieving the Security Database of an SMP Gateway
You may want to replace your current local security database with the security database that exists on a particular SMP Gateway.
Proceed as follows:
SMP Gateway User Manual
•
99
‰ In
SMP Manager
, select the SMP Gateway.
‰ In the Security menu, select Get SMP Gateway Local Security Database.
SMP Manager retrieves the file from the SMP Gateway and upon your approval, updates your local security database with that retrieved from the SMP Gateway.
13.4.11 Removing the Security Database from One or More
SMP Gateways
Proceed as follows to remove the security database from one or more SMP Gateway(s):
‰ In SMP Manager , select the SMP Gateway(s) from which you want to remove the security database.
‰ In the Security menu, select Remove Security Database from SMP Gateway.
Note: If global security is enabled on the SMP Gateway, the Remove Security
Database from SMP Gateway command is unavailable. If you really want to remove local security from the gateway, you must first remove global security.
Once you have confirmed your intention and the security database has been removed, the Security column now displays the word “Local: Disabled” for the SMP Gateway(s) you selected.
Note: Only your authentication policy and your user groups and privileges are disabled.
The other security functions, such as integrity checking and firewall and VPN management, are not disabled.
You can reactivate the security database of one or more SMP Gateways by simply sending them
your local security database, as described under “Sending the Security Database to One or More
13.4.12 Unlocking a User Account
Only a person with security management privileges can unlock user accounts that have been locked out following failed login attempts.
To unlock one or more user accounts:
‰ In SMP Manager , select the SMP Gateway for which you want to perform the unlock operation.
‰ In the Security menu, select Unlock User Account.
‰ In the Unlock Accounts for “< SMP Gateway >” dialog box:
‰ Select Unlock all accounts .
OR
100
•
SMP Gateway User Manual
‰ Select
Unlock specific account
, and specify the account in the
User Name
box.
In the example shown next, 2 user accounts are locked out, and we will request to unlock Joan’s account.
‰ Click Unlock to unlock the account(s).
Following the unlocking operation, the number in the Accounts locked box is decremented accordingly.
13.4.13 Viewing the Security Log
If you have security management privileges, you can view the security log and see all securityrelated events, including:
‰ All authentications, whether granted or refused.
‰ All user account locks and unlocks.
‰ All configuration, maintenance, and security management activities.
‰ All Telnet, Web and passthrough server accesses.
‰ Integrity check status information.
‰ Security server status information.
To view the security log:
‰ From SMP Manager’s Tools menu, click SMP Log.
‰ In the SMP Log application window, click the Security folder in the left pane.
The security-related events will appear in the right pane.
SMP Gateway User Manual
•
101
13.5 File certification and integrity checking
Every executable file on the SMP Gateway and every SMP Tool are digitally signed to ensure that it originates from Cooper Power Systems. A digital fingerprint is encrypted and inserted in the file at the factory.
Whenever you upload a file to the SMP Gateway, SMP Manager or SMP Loader performs an integrity check on the file. Furthermore, a continuous integrity check is performed on the
SMP Gateway at all times, to detect whether any executable file has been tampered with by a virus or if an unauthorized file has been loaded via an unconventional method.
Once you have uploaded a version of the SMP Gateway software that includes file integrity checking to the SMP Gateway, you cannot use a previous uncertified version of the SMP Gateway software, or a version of the SMP Tools that use uncertified files, since they would fail the integrity checks.
13.5.1
13.5.2
Detecting an integrity check failure
If a file fails the integrity check, the SMP Gateway restarts and goes into a mode in which there is no communication between the devices and the SMP Gateway.
You can detect this situation as follows:
‰ In the
SMP Manager
window, the
Status
column shows that the SMP Gateway is in “Safe mode”.
‰ All device points are tagged with a communications failure attribute. A series of alarms are generated, at the SCADA level or in a local HMI.
‰ The
Reset
log indicates that the integrity check function has restarted the SMP Gateway in
“Safe mode”.
‰ The Security log contains an entry indicating when the problem was detected, and several entries identifying each file that failed the integrity check. It can take up to 5 minutes for all entries to appear in the log.
Recovering from an integrity failure
Windows CE, which is installed in the SMP Gateway, is the software responsible for the integrity check. If the gateway goes into “safe mode”, it means that the gateway’s application needs to be updated to match Windows CE. To do so:
‰
See “Updating the SMP Gateway Application”, page 224.
‰ If the SMP Gateway goes into “Safe mode” after the update, contact Cybectec Technical
Support.
13.6 Using VPN Connections
The SMP 4 and SMP 16 each offer their own built-in firewall, which provides maximum security against intrusion through the substation LAN.
102
•
SMP Gateway User Manual
13.6.1
When enabled, the firewall shuts off all the TCP/UDP ports of the SMP Gateway, except for the
VPN port (TCP 1723) and another port (23) that is reserved for internal use. All the network messages exchanged between the SMP Gateway and the SMP Tools go through the VPN port. If security is enabled, these messages are encapsulated and encrypted by the VPN (Virtual Private
Network) protocol before being forwarded to the destination port.
SMP Tools use several TCP/UDP ports. If any tool tries to connect to an SMP Gateway configured with the firewall, the tool automatically establish a VPN connection to the gateway.
There are still some cases where you want to set up and use a VPN connection manually, which is the subject of the next section.
Manually Setting Up a VPN Connection
As seen previously, VPN connections are automatically established by the SMP Tools when they connect to an SMP Gateway secured by its built-in firewall. You still may need to set up and use a
VNP connection manually if:
‰ The firewall is active, and the software application you want to use to connect to the
SMP Gateway is not an SMP Tool (for example, the CoDeSys development environment used for automation purposes);
‰ The firewall is inactive, but you still want to encrypt the data that is exchanged between the software application and the SMP Gateway.
Note: To manually set up a VPN connection, the user must have the System
Management privilege for the SMP Gateway.
To set up/use a VPN connection:
‰ In SMP Manager, select the gateway for which you want to configure a VPN connection from your PC.
‰ From the Gateway menu, select Make VPN Connection.
‰ What happens when you click this function the first time is:
‰ It creates a new connection in the Network Connections view of Windows’ Control
Panel.
‰ In SMP Manager, under the
VPN
column for the selected gateway, you will see the
“ Connecting… ” status message, then “ Connected ”.
‰ In Windows, open the Start menu, and navigate up to the \All
Programs\Accessories\Communications menu. Select Network Connections . You will now see a new icon named after your gateway, under
Virtual Private Network
.
‰ You are now ready to use your tool/application through the VPN connection.
Note: Microsoft Windows© XP only allows 2 outgoing VPN connections simultaneously.
SMP Gateway User Manual
•
103
To disconnect from the VPN:
‰ From SMP Manager’s Gateway menu, click Disconnect VPN .
13.7 Configuring the Firewall
In the System branch of the left pane in SMP Config, you will find the Firewall branch. This firewall is protecting the SMP Gateway and consequently the IEDs it connects to. The following section describes how to configure the firewall, as well as the various options that are offered to you with the firewall.
Note: Before enabling the firewall, make sure you can use VPN connections through your corporate network; otherwise, you will lose all communications with the
SMP Gateway, since all but the VPN port will be closed.
13.7.1 Creating the Firewall in SMP Config
The first step is the creation of a firewall instance under the firewall branch:
‰ From SMP Config, under the System branch, click Firewall .
‰ Under Name , type a name for your firewall. A pencil will appear on the textbox left side.
‰ Click Firewall again, you will see a ‘+’ sign appear beside the Firewall branch in the tree view. Expand the Firewall branch, and the branch of the instance you just created. You will see two new branches: General and Rules . The parameters they contain are described in the next sections.
104
•
SMP Gateway User Manual
13.7.2 Setting General Parameters
Parameter
Enabled
Log Enabled
Max VPN Connections
Description
The
Enabled
checkbox enables or disables the firewall.
The Log Enabled checkbox enables or disables the firewall log. If you enable the log, all significant information related to firewall activity will be entered into the log. You will be able to view the contents of the
Firewall
log with
SMP Log
.
The
Max VPN Connections text box allows you to specify the maximum number of incoming VPN connections allowed. The default value is 2, but you can increase this number to a maximum of 5.
Note: Before enabling the firewall, make sure you can use VPN connections through your corporate network; otherwise, you will lose all communications with the
SMP Gateway, as all but the VPN port will be closed.
13.7.3
13.7.3.1
Setting Firewall Rules
Creating a rule
Once you created the firewall, you can now configure the ports you need to open for access. This operation is called creating a firewall rule.
The Rules branch is where you can create a firewall rule. It can be used to open additional ports in the firewall, to specify whether the ports will be accessed via the TCP or UDP protocol, and
SMP Gateway User Manual
•
105
optionally, the IP addresses of computers that will be granted access through the ports. Two default rules are provided by default for the CoDeSys and Passthru rules.
In the following illustration, the rule “Test” opens ports 2270 to 2280 to UDP messages. It is specified that only computers with IP addresses beginning by 10.87.X.X can use these ports.
It is also in the
Rules
branch that you can activate
Passthru
and
CoDeSys
access, simply by clearing the Disabled checkbox.
13.7.3.2 Deleting a rule
To delete a rule:
‰ Click in the row. You will see an arrow on the left side of the right pane.
‰ Click the arrow and press the Delete key.
13.8 Locking Incoming RAS and Passthrough
Connections
Incoming RAS dialup connections to the SMP Gateway, and passthrough connections between the
SMP Gateway and the devices, represent yet another possible security threat to the SMP Gateway.
The control center can lock all incoming RAS dialup connections, as well as individual passthrough connections, using some of the SMP Gateway’s logical data points.
These data points, which you can view with the SMP Gateway’s web browser, are listed in the table below.
Data Point
_smp___dialupEnable
Description
This binary output point is used to lock or unlock all incoming RAS dialup connections to the SMP Gateway.
_smp___dialupEnabled This binary input point indicates if incoming RAS dialup connections to the SMP Gateway are allowed or not..
106
•
SMP Gateway User Manual
13.8.1
Data Point
_smp___dialupInUse
_smp___passthru< connection >Enable
_smp___passthru< connection >Enabled
Description
This binary input point indicates whether or not there is communication in progress via an incoming RAS dialup connection.
This binary output point is used to lock or unlock a particular passthrough connection. The name of the connection, as defined in
SMP Config
, is included in the name of the data point.
This binary input point indicates whether a particular passthrough connection is currently enabled or disabled.
_smp___passthru< connection >InUse This binary input point indicates whether a particular passthrough connection is currently active.
The following sections explain the various methods available to lock/unlock RAS/passthrough connections.
Locking or Unlocking All Incoming RAS Dialup
Connections
The control center can lock all incoming RAS dialup connections at any time, regardless of whether or not there is communication in progress. When the SMP Gateway restarts, RAS dialup connections’ lock information is preserved.
There are 2 ways to lock or unlock incoming RAS dialup connections:
Method 1
‰ In the SMP Manager window, select the SMP Gateway and start a Telnet session.
‰ Type the command that starts the RAS manager:
RASMGR
‰ Type the command that toggles between locking and unlocking incoming dialup connections.
X
The following example illustrates how you can lock, and then unlock RAS dialup connections.
(H) Help, (Q) Quit [h]: x
Do you want to lock the incoming dialup connections? [N]: y
The incoming dialup connections are now locked.
(H) Help, (Q) Quit [h]: x
Do you want to unlock the incoming dialup connections? [Y]: n
The incoming dialup connections are now unlocked.
SMP Gateway User Manual
•
107
13.8.2
Method 2
‰ From the SCADA, perform the OPEN or CLOSE operation on the
_smp___dialupEnable data point. You can do a Direct Execute or a Select Before
Operate (SBO) . For more information on how to perform control operations using Visual
Substation Explorer, refer to Visual Substation Explorer User Guide , GUI-00115-00020 T).
Locking or Unlocking a Passthrough Connection
The control center can lock or unlock passthrough connections individually, and can also request that a particular passthrough connection be automatically locked or unlocked on SMP Gateway startup.
To lock or unlock a passthrough connection:
‰ From the SCADA, perform the OPEN or CLOSE operation on the
_smp___passthru< connection >Enable data point. You can do a Direct Execute or a Select Before Operate (SBO) . For more information on how to perform control operations using Visual Substation Explorer, refer to Visual Substation Explorer User Guide , GUI-
00115-00020 T).
To request that a particular passthrough connection be locked or unlocked on SMP Gateway startup:
‰ In SMP Manager , select the SMP Gateway, and then start SMP Config .
‰ In the left pane, click Passthru Connections .
‰ In the right pane, select the passthrough connection, and then either select or clear the Locked at Startup checkbox.
108
•
SMP Gateway User Manual
14 Using Passthrough
Connections
Most manufacturers of recent IEDs provide native vendor tools (NVT) for the configuration and maintenance of their devices. These tools usually connect to the device using a serial link or, less frequently, a network connection.
The optional SMP Gateway passthrough feature gives you the ability to use PC-based tools to access the devices connected to an SMP Gateway. With this feature, the SMP Gateway serves as a terminal server for remote maintenance, monitoring and control of the connected devices.
14.1 Principles of Operation
The native vendor tools expect the device to be connected to a serial port on the PC. Since the device is now connected to the SMP Gateway instead, the passthrough function has to intercept this communications link and provide a mechanism to exchange data between the NVT and the
SMP Gateway.
The passthrough functionality is implemented by two software components: the SMP Connect windows application, which is part of the SMP Tools suite, and the SMP Gateway’s Passthrough
Server. An overview of the passthrough functionality is presented in the following illustration.
•
109 SMP Gateway User Manual
VIRTUAL
LOOPBACK
PORT
PC
NVT
SMP
CONNECT
SCADA
PASSTHROUGH
SERVER
COMM
LINK
SLAVE
COMPONENT
REAL-TIME
DATA EXCHANGE
MASTER
COMPONENT
COMM
LINK
SMP GATEWAY
110
•
DEVICE
Figure 12 Using a passthrough connection
A virtual loopback connection must be set up between SMP Connect and the NVT. This allows
SMP Connect to intercept the communications link from the maintenance or configuration tool, and forward the data to the SMP Gateway. The SMP Gateway’s passthrough server then forwards the data to the device via a serial link. The result is that maintenance and configuration tools can operate as if the device were directly connected to the PC.
While the PC application is communicating with the IED or RTU, the latter may have to suspend its data acquisition; depending on the serial line and device type involved, it may be necessary for all devices on the line to suspend their data acquisition, even though only one device is engaged in
SMP Gateway User Manual
communications with the PC application. This suspension is illustrated using a red “X” in Figure
SMP Connect terminates the passthrough connection if a problem arises or if there is no data exchanged during a specified timeout period.
14.2 Setting up Passthrough Connections
Setting up a passthrough connection involves a number of steps.
‰ Using
SMP Config
, you identify the devices that will be accessed through passthrough connections. For each device, you provide information such as the SMP Gateway port to be used for the passthrough connection, and the timeout after which the passthrough connection is to be terminated after the last data exchange.
‰ In
SMP Connect
, you identify each application that will communicate with a device via a passthrough connection. For each of these applications, you specify the type of loopback connection to be established between SMP Connect and the application, and you define the communications settings of the loopback connection.
14.2.1 Defining SMP Gateway Passthrough Settings
Using SMP Config , define the SMP Gateway passthrough settings for each device that will be using a passthrough connection:
‰ In the left pane, click Passthru Connections .
‰ Create a new connection by entering the following information in the empty row:
‰ IED Name .
This name will be used to identify the device in the SMP Connect program. You should use the same name that you assigned to the device when configuring the master protocol component that it communicates with.
‰ Port Name .
Choose the serial port or the TCP/IP connection that links the SMP Gateway to the configuration port of the device. Some devices use separate configuration and data ports.
If it is the case, you must use two separate cables to connect the device to the
SMP Gateway User Manual
•
111
14.2.2
SMP Gateway and specify here the port that will be used by the IED maintenance and/or configuration programs; otherwise, the port must be the same as the one used by the master protocol.
‰ Suspend Link .
This setting indicates that data acquisition should be suspended for all other devices sharing the multidrop link while SMP Connect is communicating with the selected device. If selected, acquisition of the remaining devices will be suspended. This setting applies only to devices that support the feature.
‰ Suspend IED .
This device-specific setting indicates whether or not the master protocol component should suspend data acquisition while SMP Connect is communicating with the device.
‰ IED Address .
This address identifies the device in a multidrop configuration. This setting is ignored if the Suspend IED checkbox is not selected.
‰ Modem Signals .
This setting specifies whether or not the serial port associated with the IED supports modem control signals. If selected, the DTR and RTS modem control signals will be transferred across the passthrough connection. By default, modem control signals are
NOT transferred.
‰ Locked at Startup .
This setting is a security feature. If selected, the passthrough connection will not be available when the SMP Gateway starts up. You can subsequently make it available by
enabling specific logical data points, as explained under “Locking Incoming RAS and
Passthrough Connections”, page 106.
‰ Inactivity Timeout
.
This mandatory setting specifies how long the passthrough connection link established by
SMP Connect can remain inactive. If the program detects that no data exchange occurred between the device and the application during the specified timeout period, it prompts the user to either terminate the session or specify a longer wait time.
‰ Comments .
This optional setting is used to store the instructions that will be displayed to the SMP
Connect operator, such as telling him which communications program to use with the device.
Installing a Loopback Cable, if Necessary
There are 3 types of loopback connections that you can set up between the device manufacturer’s maintenance or configuration application and SMP Connect :
‰ A virtual serial loopback connection.
This is the preferred choice.
‰ A real serial loopback connection.
You set up this type of connection only if the device manufacturer’s application cannot use a virtual communications port.
112
•
SMP Gateway User Manual
‰ A TCP/IP loopback connection.
You set up this type of connection only if the device manufacturer’s application uses TCP/IP.
TCP/IP and virtual serial loopbacks do not require any further physical modifications to the configuration.
To set up a real serial loopback connection:
‰ Configure the device manufacturer’s application to use one of the PC’s serial ports, COM1 for example.
‰ Attach a null modem cable to this serial port.
Note : A null modem cable is an RS-232 cable that crosses the sending wire with the receiving wire.
‰ Instead of attaching the other end of the cable, to the device, attach it to a second serial port of the same PC, for example COM2.
Note : Most modern PCs are equipped only with a single serial port. If virtual communications ports are not supported by the application and the PC is only equipped with a single serial port, a serial expansion card must be installed on the PC.
14.2.3 Setting Up a List of Applications and Loopback
Connections
SMP Connect communicates with the device manufacturer’s application via a loopback connection. There may be several applications running on the PC. You have to identify all the available applications, and for each application that must remotely access a substation device, you have to provide the following information:
‰ Specify whether the application is to be started manually, identify the path to the application, and provide any arguments required by the program.
‰ Specify what type of loopback connection is to be used between SMP Connect and the application, and define the communications settings of the loopback connection. Loopback
connection types are described in section 14.2.2, above.
To start SMP Connect :
‰ Select your SMP Gateway in SMP Manager ’s application window.
‰ In the Tools menu, select SMP Connect .
The
SMP Connect
application window appears, showing a list of all the passthrough connections you previously configured with SMP Config for this SMP Gateway.
SMP Gateway User Manual
•
113
The top portion of the screen shows the settings you entered in
SMP Config
, with one additional piece of information: the PThru Active column, which indicates whether a passthrough connection is currently being used for a particular device. The bottom portion of the screen shows a trace of passthrough connection events.
To identify the application program that will communicate with a device, and to define the communications settings of the loopback connection used for that matter, proceed as follows:
‰ Select the device in the top pane of the SMP Connect window.
‰ In the Control menu, select IED Application Settings.
The IED Application Settings dialog box appears.
114
•
To add an application to the list:
‰ In the IED Application Settings dialog box, click Add .
‰ In the dialog box that appears, type the application’s name and click OK .
‰ Select the newly created application in the list.
SMP Gateway User Manual
‰ Under Application Settings:
‰
‰ Specify whether the application is to be started manually. If you select to start it manually, then when you connect to the device, SMP Connect will start the passthrough and loopback connections without starting the application; you will be able to start the application manually.
‰
‰
Type the complete path to the application’s executable file.
Type the command line arguments required by the application, if any (see the manufacturer’s documentation).
Under Local Communication Settings:
‰ Specify whether SMP Connect is to use a virtual serial loopback, a real serial loopback, or a TCP/IP loopback connection to communicate with the NVT. Most manufacturers’ tools use a serial (virtual or real) connection. However, if you are using a terminal emulator program such as Microsoft HyperTerminal to communicate with the device, you can use a TCP/IP loopback connection.
‰ Click Configure to specify the loopback connection’s settings:
‰ The application port (serial only).
‰ The communications settings, such as parity, data bits, stop bits, flow control (serial only).
‰ The SMP Connect port (real serial only).
‰ The logical port number for the TCP/IP connection; type the same TCP/IP port number that you set in the device manufacturer’s tool or in the HyperTeminal program (TCP/IP only).
‰ An indication whether your application uses the Telnet protocol, or not. Most terminal applications using TCP/IP do use the Telnet protocol, so the checkbox is selected by default (TCP/IP only).
‰ Under Remote Communication Settings:
‰ Specify whether you want the passthrough server to wait until the application’s first data transmission before initializing the connection between the device and the SMP Gateway, or initialize it as soon as the application is started.
‰ Specify whether you want the passthrough server to automatically reset the passthrough connection upon transmission failure. If you select this checkbox, specify the time to wait following the detection of the transmission failure before resetting the connection.
Note : You can also use the Apply base settings for arrow-button to apply default base settings for some type of applications.
Repeat the previous steps for all applications. Make sure you click OK to save the settings and close the IED Application Settings dialog box.
SMP Gateway User Manual
•
115
14.3 Connecting to the Device
Once you have configured the passthrough server and the SMP Connect application, you are ready to establish a passthrough connection to the device:
‰ In SMP Connect, select the device in the device list.
‰ In the Control menu, select Connect to IED .
‰ In the IED Application Selection dialog box, choose the application /NVT that will communicate with the device.
‰ Click the Connect button.
If you requested that the application be started manually, the trace window will show that
SMP Connect has established the SMP Gateway passthrough connection and has started the loopback connection with the application, but the application window will not open. Start the application now.
You are now ready to use the application the same way you would if you were connected to it locally.
14.4 Testing the Passthrough Connection
Setting up a passthrough connection is usually a straightforward operation. When problems occur, it is often because a device cannot communicate and perform data acquisition simultaneously.
You may find the following guidelines useful in identifying and solving problems with passthrough connections:
‰ Using SMP Config , check the Suspend IED setting for the selected passthrough connection.
If you modifed the setting, remember to load the modified configuration and restart the
SMP Gateway.
‰ Using SMP Connect , check the message pane to see if the passthrough connection is being activated correctly.
‰ Using SMP Trace , open the Master Protocols folder, and check whether the component is receiving requests from the control center.
‰ Using SMP Trace , open the PassThruServer folder, and check whether any data is being exchanged with the device.
‰ Using SMP Trace , open the Connections folder, and check whether any data is being exchanged with the device.
14.5 Deactivating the Passthrough Connection
To deactivate the passthrough connection:
116
•
SMP Gateway User Manual
‰ Close the manufacturer’s application or HyperTerminal.
OR
‰ Click the device in the SMP Connect window.
‰ In the Control menu, click Disconnect from IED.
The SMP Connect trace window now shows that the passthrough connection is no longer active.
Note : The passthrough connection is automatically deactivated if there is no data exchanged on the link during the inactivity timeout period specified in
SMP Config for this particular passthrough connection.
14.6 Using the Trace of Passthrough Connection
Events
The bottom portion of the SMP Connect application window is used to display passthrough connection event messages. It is quite useful to identify and solve passthrough connection problems. It can also be configured to display all the data that is exchanged during a given passthrough session. The whole trace can be printed or saved to a text file.
To display all exchanged data in SMP Connect’s trace pane:
‰ Before establishing a passthrough connection, in SMP Connect’s View menu, select Detail
Trace .
To print the current content of the trace pane:
‰ In SMP Connect’s
View
menu, select
Print Preview
, if you want to get a preview of the printed trace, or Print if you want to print it directly.
To save the current content of the trace pane to a file:
‰ In SMP Connect’s View menu, select Save As .
‰ In the
Save As
dialog box, select the directory where you want to save the file and type the file name.
‰ Click Save .
To clear the contents of the trace pane:
‰ In SMP Connect’s
View
menu, select
Clear Trace
.
SMP Gateway User Manual
•
117
14.7 Changing How Time Information is Displayed in SMP Connect
To change how time information is displayed:
‰ From the View menu, click Time Display Options.
‰ From the Time Display Options dialog box, select the type of display from the Time Display
Format drop box: you can choose between the local time (using the PC’s time zone settings) and UTC. Normally, your SMP Gateway’s clock is set in UTC, but you can display the information using the time format you like.
118
•
SMP Gateway User Manual
15 Retrieving Event Files
From Devices
Many devices produce digital fault records or other event files. You can setup your SMP Gateway so that it automatically retrieves these files and stores them on one or more computers for subsequent analysis.
Using SMP Config , you will go through the following steps:
‰ Define system folders. These folders can either be located on the SMP Gateway or on a remote computer.
‰ Specify in which system folder(s) master protocol instances will store the event files that they retrieve from the device.
The following sections explain these steps in details.
You can also configure an SMP Gateway to retrieve files from another SMP Gateway. This can be particularly useful in a substation where an SMP Gateway is the single access point to multiple other SMP Gateways that are configured to retrieve event files. The final section of this chapter explains how to configure interconnected SMP Gateway for files retrieval.
15.1 Defining System Folders
System folders are virtual folders, defined for a given SMP Gateway, which are used to store event files. Two types of system folders can be configured:
‰ Remote System Folder.
A remote system folder is a shared folder on a remote computer, which is identified using the
Unified Naming Convention
(UNC). Essentially, you refer to such a folder by combining the computer and folder names (ex. \\ComputerName\Shared FolderName). To use remote folders, the SMP Gateway must have access to a WINS server in order to resolve computer names.
See the SMP Gateway installation guide for more information.
‰ Local System Folder.
This type of folder is located on the SMP Gateway itself. Be aware that disk space is limited on an SMP Gateway, if you compare it to nowadays computers hard drives.
SMP Gateway User Manual
•
119
To define system folders in a SMP Gateway configuration, proceed as follows:
‰ Open SMP Manager.
‰ Select the SMP Gateway that will retrieve event files.
‰ From the Tools menu, select SMP Config .
‰ In the left pane of the
SMP Config
window, click
System Folders
.
120
•
‰ For each new remote folder, enter the following information in the Remote System Folders pane:
‰
‰
‰
‰
The numerical Folder ID , which is a number ranging from 1 to 99. On an SMP Gateway, each system folder, remote or local, must have a unique ID.
The folder Name . This name references the folder in master protocols’ file-retrieval settings. It is also used in traces, logs and stats.
The Location of the shared folder, using Unified Naming Convention. For example, the location \\cpu104\Events refers to a shared folder called Events on a computer named cpu104 .
A
Username
and a
Password,
if access to the shared folder is secured. You must use the machinename\username or domainname\username format.
‰
‰
‰
The number of bytes that will trigger a transition on a specific logical data point, thereby advising you that space is running low (see the Master Protocol Common Concepts document for details). The maximum value you can type is 2,147,483,647, and the default is 0 (no notification at all).
Select the Compress checkbox to compress and archive event files to a ZIP file. If a given event is made of multiple files, all files will be compressed and archived together in the same ZIP file.
Optionally, you can provide a description of the folder.
‰ For each new local folder, enter the following information in the Local System Folders pane:
SMP Gateway User Manual
‰
‰
The numerical
Folder ID
, which is a number ranging from 1 to 99. On an SMP Gateway, each system folder, remote or local, must have a unique ID.
The folder Name . This name references the folder in master protocols’ file-retrieval settings. It is also used in traces, logs and stats.
‰
‰
‰
The number of bytes that will trigger a transition on a specific logical data point, thereby advising you that space is running low (see the Master Protocol Common Concepts document for details). The maximum value you can type is 2,147,483,647, and the default is 0 (no notification at all).
Select the Compress checkbox to compress and archive event files to a ZIP file. If a given event is made of multiple files, all files will be compressed and archived together in the same ZIP file.
Optionally, you can provide a description of the folder.
15.2 Configuring Master Protocols for Event File
Retrieval
Having defined system folders, you can now configure an event-retrieving master protocol component and assign it a system folder.
Note : Configuring an Interconnections master instance for files retrieval requires a
different procedure, which is described in the “Retrieving files from another
To configure a master protocol instance for event retrieval, proceed as follows:
‰ Open SMP Manager.
‰ Select the SMP Gateway that will retrieve event files.
‰ From the Tools menu, select SMP Config .
‰ In the left pane of the
SMP Config
window, expand the master protocol instance’s branch.
‰ Click Event Files . The list of event files that can be retrieved using this protocol instance is listed in the right pane.
‰ In the right pane, the event file has automatically been assigned a Name , based on the protocol. For example, an IEC 60870-5-103 event file is called a “Disturbance Data File”, a
Hathaway BCM-200 event file is called a “Breaker Operation Record”, and a Hathaway DFR
1200 is called a “Digital Fault Record”.
‰ The event file has automatically been assigned a Short Name , also based on the protocol. To continue with the aforementioned example, the 3 short names would be DDF, BOR and DFR, respectively. You cannot modify the short name.
SMP Gateway User Manual
•
121
‰ Select the
Disabled
checkbox if you want to disable the event file retrieval function, in which case you may skip the remaining steps. By default, the checkbox is cleared since it is assumed that you want to retrieve the files.
‰ Choose a folder in the Folder drop-down list. This list contains the names of the system
folders you defined previously (see “Defining System Folders”, above).
‰ In the File Rule drop-down list, choose which event files the master protocol instance will retrieve at the SMP Gateway’s startup:
‰ New files only.
Only those files that were generated since the last time a file was retrieved from the device.
‰ Files from last X days.
All files generated in the last X days, regardless of whether or not some of them may have already been stored in the system folder. If you choose this option, you must specify the number of days in the Max File Age box.
‰ All files.
All available files, without restriction.
‰ If you selected the Files from last X days rule, specify a number of days in the Max File Age box. For example, a value of 5 means that all files generated in the last 5 days will be retrieved at startup.
‰ In the Minimum Free Disk Space box, specify the amount of disk space that has to be available in the system folder in order to store an event file. When there is less disk space available than what you have specified, the event files will no longer be retrieved from the device. The maximum value you can type is 2,147,483,647, and the default is 0. If you type a value of 0, available disk space will not be verified.
‰ Optionally, you can type some meaningful information in the
Extra Info
box. This information will be appended to each event file name.
‰ Optionally, you can provide a description of the event file(s).
15.3 Retrieving files from another SMP Gateway
If two SMP Gateways are interconnected, you can configure them to exchange event files. File exchange is based on the same principles that drive operational data acquisition: a slave
SMP Gateway is configured to make the files it retrieves available for a master SMP Gateway, which is configured to gather the files. The master SMP Gateway can also be configured to provide the files to another SMP Gateway, and so on.
Before going any further, you must configure the SMP Gateways to communicate together. You
can learn how to do this by reading the “Interconnecting SMP Gateways” section, page 77.
122
•
SMP Gateway User Manual
Note : Interconnection file exchanges can only occur on “permanent sessions”. This means that if you want a slave SMP Gateway to provide files to multiple master
SMP Gateways, you must specify one single client for each master gateway in
the slave SMP Gateway’s Interconnections slave instance. The “Configuring the
Slave SMP Gateway” section, page 78, explains how to configure permanent
session Interconnections.
Now that the gateways are interconnected, configure the slave SMP Gateway so it can gather all event files and make them available:
‰ Open SMP Manager.
‰ Select the SMP Gateway that will provide the event files (the slave SMP Gateway).
‰ From the Tools menu, select SMP Config .
‰ In the left pane of the
SMP Config
window, select the Interconnections slave instance.
‰ Expand the instance branch and select Clients . Make sure a client entry is defined for the master SMP Gateway, and that it is configured for permanent session.
‰ Select the Event Files branch.
‰ Type a Share Name for the folder that will be used for the file exchange. This folder exists only in the Interconnection session, and has nothing to do with the system folders used by master protocol components to retrieve event files from devices.
‰ Select the System Folder to monitor. This folder contains the files, retrieved by master protocol component(s), that you want to transfer to the master SMP Gateway through the interconnection.
‰ Under Client, s elect the Interconnections Client you defined for the master SMP Gateway.
This setting is used to make sure that the appropriate client is getting the appropriate files.
‰ Save the configuration file and close SMP Config.
‰
Send the configuration file to the SMP Gateway using SMP Manager (see “Updating the
Configuration File” on page 225), and then restart the gateway.
Configure the master SMP Gateway so it can poll the slave SMP Gateway for new files:
‰ Open SMP Manager.
SMP Gateway User Manual
•
123
‰ Select the SMP Gateway that will retrieve the files (the master SMP Gateway).
‰ From the Tools menu, select SMP Config .
‰ Configure the system folder that will be used to store the files retrieved from the slave
SMP Gateway. See “Defining System Folders”, above.
Note: The Compress setting will have no effect here if the files are already compressed on the slave SMP Gateway.
‰ Assign the system folder to the Interconnection master instance:
‰ In the left pane of the SMP Config window, select the master instance.
‰ Expand the instance branch and select Event Files .
124
•
‰ Type the name of the Source Folder on the slave SMP Gateway. You should type here the same string you typed for the Share Name setting in the slave gateway’s
Interconnections slave instance.
‰ Select the system folder you just defined for storage.
‰ In the Min Free Disk Space box, specify the amount of disk space that has to be available in the system folder in order to store an event file. When there is less disk space available than what you have specified, the event files will no longer be retrieved from the slave SMP Gateway. The maximum value you can type is 2,147,483,647, and the default is 0 (event files are always retrieved, regardless of available disk space).
‰ Specify the Scan Interval , in seconds, at which the master gateway will poll the slave gateway for new files to retrieve.
‰ Save the configuration file and close SMP Config.
‰
Send the configuration file to the SMP Gateway using SMP Manager (see “Updating the
Configuration File” on page 225), and then restart the gateway.
SMP Gateway User Manual
16 Using the Annunciator
Interface
The SMP Gateway’s Annunciator option is a cost-effective solution that provides a local HMI for substation operators. Using SMP Config, you can set up alarms based on the analog and binary data points of your SMP Gateway, and design simple pages to display the current statuses and values of these points and alarms on a touch screen, which also allows you to handle the alarms and perform control operations.
Note : The Annunciator option is only available for the SMP 16/CP and SMP 16/SG.
With the Annunciator option, you can:
‰ monitor a list of all active alarms, as well as alarms that have returned to normal but have not been acknowledged yet;
‰ acknowledge, block and clear alarms;
‰ consult an history log of recent alarms and operations on alarms;
‰ access some of the SMP Gateway’s internal statistics;
‰ monitor real-time values of the SMP Gateway’s data points through user-defined and highly customizable readings pages;
‰ perform control operations on your SMP Gateway on site, just like you would from the
SCADA.
An example of the Annunciator’s display is presented on next page. In this example, we see a readings page that has been designed to display the simplified single-line diagram of a feeder.
•
125 SMP Gateway User Manual
126
•
The Annunciator’s display is divided in three parts:
‰ The alarm counters bar.
This bar is located at the top of the display, and shows in real-time the number of active and blocked alarms.
‰ The display tabs.
The various display pages can be accessed via a tab-based navigation system. The following tabs are available:
‰ Alarms.
Display the list of all alarms that are active, or that have returned to normal and that have not been recalled yet. You can also use this tab to manage the alarms.
To customize this page, see “Setting Up the Alarms Page”, page 131.
To learn how to manage alarms, see “Managing Alarms”, page 152.
‰ Readings.
Display user-defined pages that show real-time values of data points and allow control operations on the SMP Gateway’s output points.
To create reading pages, see “Creating a User-Defined Readings Page”, page 140.
To learn how to control output points from a readings page, see “Performing Control
Operations From a Readings Page”, page 159.
SMP Gateway User Manual
‰ Blocked.
Display the list of blocked alarm inputs. The operator can block an alarm input to disable the triggering of alarms for this given input, even when alarm conditions are met. Such behavior may be required, when a certain part of the substation is under maintenance, for example.
To customize this page, see “Setting Up the Blocked Page”, page 134.
To learn how to block/unblock alarm inputs, see “Blocking Alarm Inputs”, page 154.
‰ History.
Display the contents of the history log file, which contains entries about recent alarm and operator actions.
To customize this page, see “Setting Up the History Page”, page 135.
To learn how to use this page, see “Using the History Log”, page 155.
‰ System State.
Display various system information and statistics about the SMP Gateway and the
Annunciator.
To learn how to use this page, see “Monitoring System Status”, page 157.
‰ The single alarm display.
This part of the display is used to manage alarms one at a time. Depending on how it is customized, the oldest or most recent alarm is displayed here, and the operator can acknowledge or clear the alarm simply by pressing the display.
In the following sections, we will describe how to set up the Annunciator using SMP Config, calibrate and connect a touch screen to the SMP Gateway, and use the Annunciator’s various functionalities.
16.1 Activating the Annunciator Option
The Annunciator option is available since version 4 of the SMP Gateway Software & Tools. To use it on your SMP Gateway, its firmware and application must be up-to-date. The Annunciator must also be part of your SMP Gateway’s license.
To learn how to update the firmware, see “Updating the SMP Gateway Firmware”, page 222.
To learn how to update the SMP Gateway’s application, see “Updating the SMP Gateway
The following section walks you through the configuration of the Annunciator within
SMP Config.
SMP Gateway User Manual
•
127
16.2 Setting Up the Annunciator
The Annunciator’s configuration is stored in the SMP Gateway’s configuration file, which is edited using SMP Config.
‰ In SMP Manager , select your SMP Gateway.
‰ From the Tools menu, select SMP Config .
SMP Config opens, displaying the current configuration of your SMP Gateway.
You must create the Annunciator instance before you can configure it. Proceed as follows:
‰ In SMP Config , from the tree view, select Annunciator .
‰ In the Annunciator Instance pane on the right, type a name for the Annunciator.
‰ Click again the Annunciator branch to create the instance.
‰ Expand the newly created branch. The resulting tree view should resemble the one that is displayed in the following illustration.
128
•
To configure the Annunciator, you must go through the following steps:
‰ Configure alarm inputs.
‰ Set up display pages.
‰ Create user-defined readings pages, if you like.
‰ Select which pages will be available for display, and which one will be displayed at startup.
You can also:
SMP Gateway User Manual
16.2.1
‰ change how time information is displayed in the various pages;
‰ set up an alarm buzzer to warn the operator of alarm occurrences.
The following sections explain all these steps in details.
Configuring Alarm Inputs
Alarms are the core of the Annunciator. You can use the Annunciator to display real-time values or to perform control operations, but its most distinctive feature is the display and handling of alarms.
Before configuring the various pages, you must configure the conditions that will trigger alarms, which are called the alarm inputs. The Annunciator supports alarm inputs from analog inputs and binary inputs. For analog inputs, alarms can be triggered when their value goes beyond a given threshold. For binary inputs, alarms can be triggered when their state changes.
To define alarm conditions for an analog input, proceed as follows:
‰ In SMP Config, from the tree view, expand the Alarms branch to reveal the Analog Inputs branch.
‰ Select the Analog Inputs branch.
‰ In the right pane’s grid, under Name , type the name of an analog input for which you want to define the alarm conditions.
Note: The same subscription feature that was available to configure slave protocols can be used instead of typing names. This is explained a bit further in this section.
‰ Under Alarm Level , select a severity level for this input’s alarms.
‰ Under Low Threshold , specify the value under which an alarm will be triggered for this input. For example, if you specify a low threshold value of -13.1, an alarm will be triggered if the input’s value becomes smaller than -13.1.
‰ Under High Threshold , specify the value over which an alarm will be triggered for this input.
For example, if you specify a high threshold value of 125.7, an alarm will be triggered if the input’s value becomes larger than 125.7.
‰ Under
Deadband
, specify how much the value must go beyond the low or high threshold to trigger an alarm. For example, if you set the deadband to a value of 5.0 and the high threshold to a value of 125.5, an alarm will be triggered if the input’s value becomes larger than 130.5.
Note : This Deadband setting is different from the one found in the configuration of master protocols, used to determine whether a value should be reported, or not, to slave protocols through RTDX.
SMP Gateway User Manual
•
129
‰ If you want to temporarily disable the triggering of alarms for this data point, select the checkbox under Disabled . The alarm conditions will be preserved in your configuration file, but will not be used by the Annunciator.
‰ Under Low Threshold Description , you can type a description for low threshold alarms on this analog input. This description will be displayed in the various Annunciator pages when such an alarm condition is met, or when an operation (ex. acknowledge) is performed on such an alarm. The High Threshold Description setting works similarly, for high threshold alarms on this input.
Typing each point’s name can be a tedious task, especially if you have a lot of alarm inputs to define. Instead, you can use the same subscribtion mechanism you used to configure your slave protocols. To do so:
‰ Select the Analog Inputs branch.
‰ From the Tools menu, select Subscribe To .
130
•
The Subscribe to Master I/O dialog box appears. You can then select the master points for which
you want to define alarm conditions. To learn how to use this dialog box, see “Subscribing to the
Master Data Points”, page 64. Once you click
OK , the dialog box closes and a line is created in the Analog Inputs pane for each data points. All that is left is to specify the conditions and descriptions for these alarm inputs.
To define alarm conditions for a binary input, proceed as follows:
‰ In the right pane’s grid, under Name , type the name of an analog input for which you want to define the alarm conditions, or use the subscribtion feature as described above for analog inputs.
‰ Under Alarm Level , select a severity level for this input’s alarms.
‰ Under Appearance Filter , specify how long, in milliseconds, the binary input must keep the active state (TRUE or 1) before triggering an alarm. This setting filters “false” alarms.
‰ Under Disappearance Filter , specify how long, in milliseconds, the binary input must keep the inactive state (FALSE or 0) before considering that the alarm is no longer active. This setting filters “false” returns to normal.
SMP Gateway User Manual
16.2.2
‰ If you wish to trigger the alarm upon a 0 instead of a 1, select the checkbox under
Inverted
.
‰ If you want to temporarily disable alarm conditions for this data point, select the checkbox under Disabled .
‰ Under Description , you can type a description for alarms on this binary input. This description will be displayed in the various Annunciator pages when such an alarm condition is met, or when an operation (ex. acknowledge) is performed on such an alarm.
Repeat those procedures for every alarm inputs.
Setting Up the Alarms Page
Once alarm conditions are defined, you may set up the various display pages, starting with the
Alarms page.
The Alarms page is essentially where all alarms are displayed in a list, and handled by the
operator of the Annunciator using touch buttons. To learn how to manage alarms, see “Managing
To configure the display settings of the Alarms page, proceed as follows:
‰ In SMP Config, from the tree view, expand the Pages branch and select the Alarms branch.
The resulting content of the right pane is presented in the next screenshot.
Anytime during the configuration process, you can preview, at the bottom of the pane, how the alarm list will look like on the Annunciator’s display:
SMP Gateway User Manual
•
131
The preview pane offers much more than that:
‰ To change the width of a column:
‰ Pass the mouse over the line that separates two column headers. The mouse cursor will change to this :
‰ Click and drag the mouse to enlarge of reduce the width of the column on the left of the cursor.
‰ If you want a given column to take all the width space that is actually unused, click the column header itself.
‰ To change the columns’ order:
‰ Drag and drop each column where you want it to appear on the display.
‰ You can also to this using the Move Up and Move Down buttons appearing under
Columns
at the top of the edition pane.
‰ To make a column available/unavailable to the operator:
‰ Right-click any column header in the preview display.
132
•
‰ A checkmark indicates that the column will be available, and it should be displayed as is in the preview pane.
‰ Select any column name to change its availability state.
SMP Gateway User Manual
The rest of the customization process is performed using in other sections at the top of the edition pane:
‰ Under Alarm list order , select which alarms should be displayed at the top of the list:
‰ The Oldest alarm at top setting is recommended if you want to deal with each alarm in order and work them down to the most recent.
‰ If you want to deal with alarms as they occur, select Most recent alarm at top .
‰ Under Single alarm display , select which alarm should be displayed anytime at the bottom of the Annunciator display:
‰ To see the oldest unacknowledged alarm, select Show oldest unacknowledged alarm .
‰ To see the most recent unacknowledged alarm, select Show most recent unacknowledged alarm
.
Note:
To learn how to use the single alarm display, see “Using the Single Alarm
‰ Under Alarm acknowledgement , select how alarms will be acknowledged by the operator:
‰ To be free to acknowledge and recall any alarm in any given order, select Alarms can be acknowledged and recalled in any order .
‰ To force the operator to acknowledge and recall alarms in the order they occur, select
Alarms must be acknowledged and recalled in the order they occurred .
‰ To automatically acknowledge and recall alarms as they occur, without the intervention of the operator, select Alarms automatically acknowledge and recall .
‰ Under Columns , select which columns should be displayed in the alarms list. Remember that you can see the result of your selection under
Preview
.
SMP Gateway User Manual
•
133
‰ Still under Columns , you can move the column names up and down using the Move Up and
Move Down
buttons. Selected columns will appear from left to right, starting with the topmost column name in the list.
‰ Under Alarm state colors , set the colors for alarm messages that appear in the Annunciator’s various display pages:
16.2.3
134
•
‰ Set the text and fill colors for active unacknowledged alarm messages. Different colors may be specified for major and minor alarms.
‰ Do the same for active acknowledged alarms, unacknowledged alarms that have returned to normal and acknowledged alarms that have returned to alarms.
‰ To revert to default colors, click Default Colors.
‰ You can also use the preview section of the edition pane to modify the columns’ width, order and availability state, like for the Alarms
page (see “Setting Up the Alarms Page”, above).
Setting Up the Blocked Page
An operator may want to “deactivate” some alarms at runtime, during maintenance periods for example. The Annunciator make it possible by allowing some data points to be blocked, which means that even when alarm conditions are met for these points, they will no longer appear in the
Alarms page: the blocked alarms are then transferred to the Blocked page.
To learn how to block and unblock alarm inputs, see “Blocking Alarm Inputs”, page 154
To configure the display settings of the Blocked page, proceed as follows:
SMP Gateway User Manual
‰ In SMP Config, from the tree view, expand the
Pages
branch and select the
Blocked Alarms branch. The resulting content of the right pane is presented in the following screenshot.
‰ Under
Columns
, select which columns should be displayed in the blocked alarms list. You can see the result of your selection under Preview .
‰ Still under Columns , you can move the column names up and down using the Move Up and
Move Down buttons. Selected columns will appear from left to right, starting with the topmost column name in the list.
‰ You can also use the preview section of the edition pane to modify the columns’ width, order and availability state, like for the
Alarms
page (see “Setting Up the Alarms Page”, above).
16.2.4 Setting Up the History Page
Alarms messages are preserved in a log file, which content is displayed in the History page.
SMP Gateway User Manual
•
135
To learn how to use this page, see “Using the History Log”, page 155.
To configure the display settings of the History page, proceed as follows:
‰ In SMP Config, from the tree view, expand the Pages branch and select the History branch.
The resulting content of the right pane is presented in the following screenshot.
‰ Under Columns , select which columns should be displayed in the messages list. You can see the result of your selection under Preview .
136
•
‰ Still under
Columns
, you can move the column names up and down using the
Move Up
and
Move Down buttons. Selected columns will appear from left to right, starting with the first column name in the list.
SMP Gateway User Manual
16.2.5
‰ You can also use the preview section of the edition pane to modify the columns’ width, order and availability state, like for the Alarms
page (see “Setting Up the Alarms Page”, above).
‰ The messages list can be filtered by the operator at runtime to display only alarm or operation messages, using touch buttons. To display these buttons in the
History
page, select the
Show display types buttons checkbox.
The messages list can hold a limited number of messages, which is called the history length. To adjust this setting:
‰ In SMP Config's tree view, under the Annunciator instance, select the General branch.
‰ Under History Length , specify the maximum number of alarm messages that will be preserved in the history log.
Setting Up the System State Page
Various system information and statistics about the SMP Gateway and the Annunciator can be displayed in the System State page.
To learn how to use this page, see “Monitoring System Status”, page 157.
To select which information should be displayed and how, proceed as follows:
‰ In SMP Config, from the tree view, expand the Pages branch and select the System State branch. The resulting content of the right pane is presented in the following screenshot.
SMP Gateway User Manual
•
137
138
•
‰ Under
Analog Points Columns
, select which columns should be displayed in analog inputs/outputs lists. You can see the result of your selection under Analog Points Preview .
SMP Gateway User Manual
‰ Still under
Analog Points Columns
, you can move the column names up and down using the
Move Up and Move Down buttons. Selected columns will appear from left to right, starting with the first column name in the list.
‰ Under Binary Points Columns , select which columns should be displayed in binary inputs/outputs lists. You can see the result of your selection under
Binary Points Preview
.
‰ Still under Binary Points Columns , you can move the column names up and down using the
Move Up and Move Down buttons. Selected columns will appear from left to right, starting with the first column name in the list.
‰ You can also use both preview sections of the edition pane to modify the columns’ width, order and availability state, like for the Alarms
page (see “Setting Up the Alarms Page”,
above).
‰ Under Statistics , select the statistics pages you want to display, by marking the corresponding checkboxes. Clear the checkboxes for the categories you want to hide. If you do not want to display any statistics, clear the Show Statistics checkbox. The following statistics pages are available in the Annunciator:
‰ Vital System Information.
Contains the same information that is displayed in the page of the same name in
SMP Stats. Information available includes hardware/software information, temperature information and power statuses.
‰ Performance (General).
Contains real-time information about the SMP Gateway’s CPU load and memory usage.
‰ Performance (Threads).
Contains real-time information about the SMP Gateway’s CPU load specific to each execution thread.
‰ Real Time Data Exchange.
Contains statistics about real-time data that is exchanged between the masters, the slaves and other software components of the SMP Gateway.
‰ SysServer.
Contains various real-time statistics that are maintained by the SMP Gateway’s system server.
‰ Master/slaves Scan Process.
Contains the scan process statistics of every master and slave.
SMP Gateway User Manual
•
139
Note: Data point information is always displayed in the System State page.
16.2.6 Creating a User-Defined Readings Page
Readings pages are used to display real-time values of some of the SMP Gateway’s data points, and to perform control operations on its output points. With some work, a simplified diagram of your substation can be made using up to 15 readings pages.
Like other display pages, readings pages are configured using SMP Config:
‰ From the tree view, expand the Pages branch and select the Readings branch. The Readings
Annunciator Page pane appears on the right.
140
•
The readings page list is found on the left. The right part of the pane is occupied by a grid of 18 lines by 9 columns. Each cell is representing a small part of a readings page, and can be used to display static text, or the current state or value of one of your SMP Gateway’s input points. A
“click action” can also be configured for the cell. Supported actions include switching the focus to another readings page and controlling one of the SMP Gateway’s output points. Above the grid, there is a toolbar giving access to all the design functions.
The following steps describe how to create and populate a readings page:
‰ Under Page List , click Add.
A new page called Page 1 was added to the list. Type a significant name for the page, or leave the default name, and press Enter .
Note: You can create a clone of an existing page, by clicking Duplicate . Also, if you want to change the name of the page later, just select the page from the list and click Rename .
‰ Cell(s) selection can be performed in many ways:
‰ To select a single cell, click it.
SMP Gateway User Manual
‰ To select all cells from a given line, click the line header.
‰ To select all cells from a given column, click the column header.
‰ To select multiple cells from different adjacent lines and column, click and drag over the cells you want to select.
‰ Finally, to select all cells, click the non-editable cell found at the intersection of the line and column headers.
‰ Select the cell at the right of the line 1’s header and under column A header: let us call it cell
1A . When you click the cell, the grid’s toolbar becomes active.
The toolbar’s various controls are presented in the following table:
Control(s) Description
Allow you to cut, copy and paste cells in the currently edited page or from this page to another one.
Allow you to undo last edits, one at a time. If you want to revert to an edit you just undo, you can use the redo button. Note that a list of edits is preserved for each page, so you can switch back to a page you left a few minutes ago and undo the last change you did to this page, for example.
Change the font and font size of cell text. Only a limited number of font and sizes are available on the SMP Gateway.
Apply the Bold or Italic font style to cell text. You can also apply both styles at the same time.
Change the text’s alignment. Available choices are: left aligned, centered and right aligned. Text is left aligned by default.
Change the cell’s font and background colors for normal text. Click the appropriate button to apply the currently selected color (as displayed on the button itself) or click the drop-down button to select the color you like.
Other color options are only accessible through the
Cell Properties dialog box, which is presented later in this section.
Clear the entire content of a cell.
SMP Gateway User Manual
•
141
Open the
Cell Properties
dialog box. Depending on the shortcut button clicked, either the
General
,
Font
or
Click
tab will be selected. The Cell Properties dialog box is presented later in this section.
Enter preview mode. This functionality is described more later in this section.
Note: If you click on any button while multiple cells are selected, the resulting modifications will be applied to all cells, if possible.
‰ Still in cell 1A, click the General Properties button ( ).
The Cell Properties dialog box opens, with the General tab selected.
Note: You can also open the Cell Properties dialog box by double-clicking a cell.
142
•
The
General
tab is used to select the type of content that will be displayed in the cell: static text or the current reading of an input point (analog or binary). Text and background colors can also be set here. The resulting display is previewed at the bottom of the tab.
‰ By default, every cell is configured to display static text. For the sake of our example, we will display the SMP Gateway internal clock’s minute field, which value is available in analog input _smp___clockMinute . Note that a static text cell can also be used to display a colored cell with no text at all.
Note: You can also type the text directly in the cell, from the Readings Annunciator
Page pane.
‰ If you like, change the text and background colors.
‰ Click the Font tab to edit the text’s font, style, alignment and size. A preview is also available in this tab.
SMP Gateway User Manual
‰ Click OK to complete edition of cell 1A.
To display the real-time value of an analog input ( _smp___clockMinute , in our example):
‰ Select cell 2A and click the General Properties button.
‰ Under Select cell content, select Display analog data point. The Cell Properties dialog box changes to this:
‰ Under
Data Point
, select the desired data point. For our example, select
_smp___clockMinute . You can also type the point’s name if you prefer.
‰ Select the number of decimals you want to display after the point for the value displayed. You can also apply a scale factor to the value before displaying it.
‰ If you like, change the text and background colors.
‰ If the data point is configured as an alarm input, you can specify different text and background colors to use while the input is in alarm. You can also make the cell blinks (it
SMP Gateway User Manual
•
143
toggles between the normal and alarm – or state 0 and state 1 – colors) by selecting the
Flash checkbox.
‰ Similarly, you can specify different colors to use when the data point’s quality is bad (ex. communications failure).
‰ You can also use the
Font
tab to edit the text’s font, style, alignment and size. Note that the same font, style, alignment and size will be used when the data point is in alarm or when its quality is bad.
‰ Click OK to apply changes.
To display the real-time state of a binary input point in a cell , the configuration process is quite similar:
‰ Select the cell that will display a binary input’s real-time state and click the General
Properties button.
‰ Under Select cell content, select Display binary data point.
‰ Under Data Point , select the desired data point. You can also type the point’s name if you prefer.
The bottom part of the
General tab
is a bit different than for analog data points:
144
•
‰ Type the text to display when the input’s state is 0. For example, if the point represents the state of a relay, you can type open . If you want the cell to blink in this state, select the
Flash checkbox.
‰ Type the text to display when the input’s state is 1. For example, if the point represents the state of a relay, you can type close . If you want the cell to blink in this state, select the
Flash
checkbox.
‰ You can specify the text and background colors to use while the point is in either state, or when the point’s quality is bad.
‰ You can also use the Font tab to edit the text’s font, style, alignment and size. Note that the same font, style, alignment and size will be used when the data point is in alarm or when its quality is bad.
‰ Click OK to apply changes.
SMP Gateway User Manual
Using the preview mode, you can transform the grid into a preview of the Annunciator’s display for this readings page. When you enter this mode, all cells configured for real-time display are replaced by simulated values.
To enter the preview mode:
‰ From the grid’s toolbar, click Preview Mode . Value cells display zero values and the Data
Point Simulator window appears.
Note: The Data Point Simulator window will remain open as long as you stay in the
Readings branch of SMP Config’s tree view.
‰ Using the Data Point Simulator, edit the current value of the points that are used in the current page. You should see the corresponding cells changing in the preview pane.
‰ Still using the Data Point Simulator, you can also simulate bad quality for any point in the list, by selecting Error under Quality .
‰ To exit preview mode, click Preview Mode , or select any other branch in SMP config’s tree view.
Finally, you can also attach an “On Click” handler function to a cell. A handler function is an operation that is performed when a cell is pressed on screen, just like it would be clicked using a mouse pointer. For example, you might like to add, to your readings pages, buttons that allow you to control specific binary outputs or to open another readings page. By default, a cell has no handler attached to it.
To add a Change page handler function to a cell:
‰ Select the cell.
‰ Double-click it, and then click the Click tab or click the On Click Properties button on the grid’s toolbar.
‰ Under Select action to perform when user clicks cell, select Change page.
SMP Gateway User Manual
•
145
‰ Under
Page
, select which readings page should be displayed when the operator will press the cell. All configured pages should be available for selection, plus the following options:
‰ <First>.
Display the first page of the readings pages list.
‰ <Previous>.
Display the page that appears just above in the readings pages list.
‰ <Next>.
Display the page that appears just below in the readings pages list.
‰ <Last>.
Display the last page of the readings pages list.
‰ When you have made your selection, click OK .
Binary output control requires a bit more configuration work, because you must set up a separate window that will appear when you press the cell. This window contain customizable buttons that allow you to set the output to state 0 and 1, and a Cancel button.
To add a Control Binary Output handler function to a cell:
‰ Select the cell.
‰ Double-click it, and then click the Click tab or click the On Click Properties button on the grid’s toolbar.
‰ Under Select action to perform when user clicks cell, select Control Binary Output.
146
•
‰ Under Data Point , select the output point you want to control. You can type the name of the point directly, if you prefer.
‰ Under Window Title, type a title for the window that will appear when the cell will be pressed.
‰ Under State 0 , customize the button that will set the output point to the state of 0:
SMP Gateway User Manual
‰ Type the button’s name in the
Label
edit box.
‰ Specify the text and background colors for the button.
‰ A preview of the button is displayed at the bottom.
‰ Repeat the previous steps, this time under State 1 , for the button that will set the output point to the state of 1.
‰ Click Preview , to have an idea of what it will look like on screen.
‰ Once you are finished, click OK .
Note: To have a larger control operation button, you can select multiple cells and add to these cells the same handler function and background color. Enter text for the center cell and you end up with a button that is more visible and easier to use.
16.2.7 Selecting the Pages to Display
By default, all pages will be available for display. For some reasons, you might want some pages to be unavailable to the operators.
To select the pages to display:
‰ In SMP Config's tree view, under the Annunciator instance, select the Pages branch. The list of all pages appears in the right pane.
SMP Gateway User Manual
•
147
16.2.8
16.2.9
‰ Mark the corresponding checkboxes for the pages you want to be available for display.
‰ Clear the corresponding checkboxes for the pages you want to be unavailable for display.
Selecting the Page Displayed at Startup
You can select which page you want the Annunciator to display at startup. To do so:
‰ In SMP Config's tree view, under the Annunciator instance, select the General branch.
‰ Under Initial Page , select the page you want to display at startup.
Changing How Time Information is Displayed
Unless it is configured otherwise, time information is stored in the UTC format on the
SMP Gateway. However, UTC is not very convenient for display and operation purposes.
Moreover, date information is not formatted the same way in all countries.
To change the date and time display format, proceed as follows:
‰ In SMP Config's tree view, under the Annunciator instance, select the General branch.
‰ Under Time Zone , select the time zone where the SMP Gateway is located.
‰ If you want the time to be automatically adjusted for daylight savings, select the checkbox under
Daylight Saving
.
‰ Under Date Format , select the format to use to display date information. By default, year is displayed first (all four digits), followed by the month and day, all separated by dashes (ex.
2008-07-03).
148
•
SMP Gateway User Manual
16.2.10 Setting Up an Alarm Buzzer
The SMP Gateway has a normally closed relay that can be used to trigger an output. If you install a buzzer on the relay’s output, you can configure the Annunciator to trigger the buzzer upon alarm.
Note: To locate the relay’s output on the SMP Gateway’s back panel, refer to the
SMP 16 Installation Guide .
To activate this feature:
‰ In SMP Config, from the tree view, select the General branch under the Annunciator instance.
‰ Select the checkbox under Close Relay Contact on Alarm .
16.2.11 Temporarily Deactivating the Annunciator
For some reasons, you might want to deactivate the Annunciator, without losing its configuration.
To do so:
‰ In SMP Config, from the tree view, select the General branch under the Annunciator instance.
‰ Select the checkbox under Disabled .
To reactivate the Annunciator later, just clear the Disabled checkbox.
16.3 Setting Up the Touch Screen
Now that you have completed the Annunciator setup, you are ready to connect and calibrate the touch screen.
Note: Cooper Power Systems recommends the use of a touch screen from Elo
TouchSystems for use with the SMP Gateway.
16.3.1 Connecting the Touch Screen to the SMP Gateway
Two cables are usually provided with a touch screen:
‰ A video cable.
This cable should be connected to the VIDEO connector of the SMP Gateway and to the video input connector of the screen.
SMP Gateway User Manual
•
149
16.3.2
‰ A cable to convey screen-touching information.
When a touch screen is used with a computer, the screen also acts as a mouse when its user touches it. The touch information is transmitted using either a USB or serial cable.
Note: If you have trouble connecting these cables to the SMP Gateway, refer to the
SMP 16 Installation Guide .
The use of a USB cable is recommended, as the SMP Gateway will detect it automatically: no configuration is required. Just connect the USB cable to the screen and to one of the USB port of the SMP Gateway.
If you must use a serial cable, follow these steps:
‰ Connect the serial cable to the screen and to one of the serial port of the SMP Gateway.
You can use any port you like, except the Console port located on the front panel of the
SMP Gateway.
‰ Start SMP Manager.
‰ Select your SMP Gateway from the list.
‰ From the Tools menu, click SMP Config .
‰
Follow the procedure described in the “Configuring the Serial Port Interfaces” section, page
34, to specify the appropriate interface (ELO Touchscreen) for the selected serial port.
Setting Up a Screen Saver using SMP Config
Your touch screen may have an energy saving feature, but you can also configure the Annunciator to enter a screen saver mode during periods of inactivity.
To set up the Annunciator’s screen saver:
‰ In SMP Manager , select your SMP Gateway.
‰ From the Tools menu, select SMP Config .
‰ In
SMP Config
, from the tree view, select
Annunciator
, then your Annunciator instance, then the General branch.
‰ Under Screen Saver Wait Time , select the inactivity time to wait before the Annunciator enters screen saver mode. You can also turn off this feature by selecting No Screen Saver .
16.4 Uploading the Configuration to the
SMP Gateway
Before you can use the Annunciator, two steps are left. You must:
‰ upload the configuration file to the SMP Gateway and restart the system;
150
•
SMP Gateway User Manual
‰ calibrate the touch screen at runtime.
restart the SMP Gateway.
At the beginning of the SMP Gateway’s startup sequence, you should see some configuration information displayed on the touch screen, and then the screen should become totally black. It will remain black during the rest of the startup sequence, which may take a few minutes.
The calibration screen eventually appears. Calibration is the topic of the next section.
16.5 Calibrating the Touch Screen
The Annunciator enter calibration mode at startup. You can also calibrate the touch screen anytime by pressing the Calibrate button found at the bottom right of the Annunciator’s display.
When the Annunciator enters calibration mode, a cross appear in the upper left corner of the screen’s display. A message prompts you to touch the screen from a position of normal use. This means that you should be in your normal working position; either sitting down or in front of the rack standing up, as you intend to use it most of the times.
‰ Touch the upper-left cross. Repeat for each cross, as they appear on-screen.
‰ When this is over, a message will appear, asking if the cursor follows your finger. Leave your finger on the screen and move it all over the display.
‰ If these new calibration settings are correct, press yes to accept them.
‰ If you want to keep the old settings, press no .
‰ In both cases, you will be taken back to the Annunciator’s display. You can recalibrate the screen anytime by pressing Calibrate .
Note: If, for some reasons, you are no longer able to access the calibration screen and you do not want to restart the SMP Gateway, you can call back the calibration
screen via a Telnet command, as described in the “Elo Touchscreen Driver
16.6 Using the SMP Gateway’s Annunciator
The following sections explain the various functions of the Annunciator.
16.6.1 Navigating Through the Different Pages
To display a given page, simply press the page’s tab name.
SMP Gateway User Manual
•
151
To select an item from any displayed list, just press the line that contains it. If your fingertips are too large or if you do not feel at ease with this method, you can use the large arrow key buttons available at the bottom of each tab.
In all tabs, except readings, up and down arrow key buttons are available to move through each item of the displayed list:
‰ In the Alarms , Blocked and History tabs, it allows you to move the selection highlight over the previous or next alarm message.
‰ In the
System State
tab, there are two sets of up and down arrow key buttons: one under the selection pane on the left, and another under the display pane on the right. Use the left set to select an information page to display in the right pane, and the right one to scroll through the displayed page.
Blocked
,
History
and
System State
tab also have home and end buttons that allow you to jump the selection highlight to the first or last item of the list. These buttons are represented by up and down double-arrows.
The
Readings
tab has a slightly different navigation scheme.
16.6.2
152
•
The index of the currently displayed readings page is displayed on the left, with the total number of pages available. On the right, two large arrow key buttons allow you to navigate through the different pages. If your configuration contains a lot of readings pages, we suggest you add Change page
buttons to each page, to customize the navigation for your needs (see “Creating a User-
Defined Readings Page”, page 140).
Managing Alarms
If you previously defined alarm conditions for this Annunciator instance, you will have to manage the alarms that will be triggered when these conditions will be met.
When an alarm condition is met for a given alarm input, this condition is detected by the
Annunciator, which:
‰ turns on the sound warning system, to alert the operator that something requires its attention;
‰ adds the data point to the
Alarms
page, as an alarm message that uses the text and background colors configured for the severity level of the condition (major or minor). The alarm message will be preceded by the ‘A’ letter, displayed on a red background.
SMP Gateway User Manual
You must turn off the sound warning system before you can acknowledge the alarm. The sound warning system also acts as an interlock, ensuring that you are aware of all the alarms that occur.
To really hear a sound, you need to install a buzzer on the SMP Gateway as described in the
“Setting Up an Alarm Buzzer” section, page 149.
To turn off the sound warning system:
‰ From the Alarms page, press Clear Sound .
You must then decide how you want to handle this alarm. Perform any of these three options:
‰ Press General Ack/Clear to acknowledge all new alarms. It also clears the Alarms display of all data points that have returned to their normal condition.
OR
‰ Press Acknowledge to acknowledge the alarm. The entire line turns to a paler shade of its original color. If more than one alarm is active, the alarm that will be acknowledged depends on the alarm acknowledgement rule selected in SMP Config for the Alarms page (see
“Setting Up the Alarms Page”, page 131). If you selected
Alarms can be acknowledged and recalled in any order , you must select the alarm to acknowledge before pressing the button.
OR
‰ Press Block to move the data point in alarm to the Blocked page. Make sure the data point you want to block is selected before pressing the button. For more details about the block
feature, see “Blocking Alarm Inputs”, page 154.
The data points that are in an alarm condition remain in the alarm display until the points return to their normal condition, at which time you can clear them from the display.
When a point returns to its normal condition, the sound warning system turns on again and the ‘A’ letter that precedes the alarm message is replaced by an ‘R’ letter, displayed on a green background.
You must once again clear the sound before you can acknowledge and recall the data point, which will then no longer be displayed in the Alarms page. Proceed as follows:
‰ Click Clear Sound to clear the sound warning system.
‰ Handle the return-to-normal event:
SMP Gateway User Manual
•
153
‰ Click
General Ack./Clear
to acknowledge all alarms and clear the alarm display of all data points that have returned to their normal condition.
OR
‰ Press
Acknowledge
to acknowledge the alarm. Again, if more than one alarm can be acknowledged, the alarm that will be acknowledged depends on the alarm acknowledgement rule selected in SMP Config for the Alarms page. If you selected
Alarms can be acknowledged and recalled in any order , you must select the alarm to acknowledge before pressing the button.
‰ Press Clear , in order to clear the alarm display of the data point that has returned to normal. The alarm acknowledgement rule defined in SMP Config also applies to clear
(recall) operations.
If an alarm is triggered more than once for a given alarm input before it can be handled, the ‘x’ character will be appended either to the ‘A’ or ‘R’ character to notify the operator about this matter.
16.6.3 Blocking Alarm Inputs
For some reasons, you might want to temporarily deactivate some alarm conditions. Such behavior may be required, when a certain part of the substation is under maintenance, for example. For this matter, the Annunciator offers an alarm input blocking feature. When an alarm input is blocked, it no longer triggers alarms, even when alarm conditions are met.
You can only block an alarm input that is currently displayed in the Alarms page. When it is blocked, the alarm input is moved to the Blocked page, and it will not appear in the Alarms page until it is reactivated. In fact, alarms will simply no longer be triggered for this input.
To block an alarm input:
‰ From the Alarms page, select the data point that you want to block.
‰ Press Block .
‰ Select the Blocked page. The blocked alarm input should be displayed here.
154
•
SMP Gateway User Manual
16.6.4
To reactivate a blocked alarm input:
‰ From the Blocked page, select the data point that you want to reactivate.
‰ Press Reactivate . The alarm input is moved back to the Alarms page. The sound warning system turns on and you will then have to take action, to acknowledge and recall the input’s
current condition (see “Managing Alarms”, above).
To reactivate all blocked alarm inputs simultaneously:
‰ From the Blocked page, press Reactivate All .
Using the Single Alarm Display
The single alarm display is found at the bottom of the Annunciator’s display.
It is used to manage alarms one at a time. Depending on how it is customized, the oldest or most recent alarm is displayed here, and the operator can acknowledge or clear the alarm simply by pressing the display.
To customize the single alarm display, see “Setting Up the Alarms Page”, page 131.
Using the single alarm display is easy:
‰ If the sound warning system is on, press the single alarm display, which will give the same result than pressing Clear Sound in the Alarms page: the sound warning system is turned off and the alarm is ready to be acknowledged.
‰ If the sound warning system has already been turned off, press the single alarm display to acknowledge the alarm just like you would do using the
Alarms
page’s
Acknowledge
button.
16.6.5 Using the History Log
An history log file is stored in the gateway’s non-volatile memory to keep track of the most recent alarms that were triggered, and of the operations that were executed to handle them. The log file is
SMP Gateway User Manual
•
155
circular and has a limited size: when it is full, new entries replace the oldest ones. The history log file’s entries are displayed in the History page, in chronological order, starting with the oldest one at the top.
This page resembles the Alarms page, with an additional column that indicates the type of entry.
Two types of entry are displayed in the History page:
‰ Alarms (an ‘A’ is displayed in the T column).
Every time an alarm appears or returns to normal, an entry is added to the log file. The message displayed is the same that appears in the Alarms page, with the ‘A’ or ‘R’ icon that indicates what happened.
‰ Operator actions (an ‘O’ is displayed in the T column).
Whether the operator clears sound, acknowledges or recalls alarms, blocks or unblocks alarm inputs, or performs control operations, an entry is added to the log file. The action executed is described in the Description column.
To customize the History
As stated previously, large arrow key buttons are available to scroll through the list of entries, and when you select an entry, all related entries are highlighted. Two filtering buttons are also available.
156
•
These buttons are kept “pressed” by default, which means that no filter is apply to the log display.
SMP Gateway User Manual
16.6.6
To filter alarm entries:
‰ Touch the Alarms (A) button. The button will appear “unpressed”, and only operator action entries should be displayed.
To display alarm entries:
‰ Touch the Alarms (A) button again. The button will appear “pressed” and the alarms entries should be displayed.
To display only operator action entries:
‰ Touch the
Operator (O)
button. The button will appear “unpressed”, and only alarm entries should be displayed.
To display operator action entries:
‰ Touch the Operator (O) button again. The button will appear “pressed” and operator action entries should be displayed.
Monitoring System Status
The System State page provides access to the SMP Gateway’s internal statistics and the current value of all its data points.
The left pane lists all information or statistics pages that can be displayed in the right pane.
SMP Gateway User Manual
•
157
Under the
Data Points
branch, some branch names might be displayed in orange. This means that the value of some data points displayed in these branches is unavailable due to communications failure. These points are also displayed in orange in the right pane.
When an analog inputs or analog outputs branch is selected, the right pane displays the following information for each analog input:
158
•
‰ Name.
The input’s name.
‰ Floating Point Value.
The input’s actual value.
‰ Integer Value.
The input’s actual raw value.
‰ Low Threshold.
The value under which an alarm will be triggered for this input, if configured to trigger alarms. Nothing is displayed if the data point is not configured to trigger alarms.
‰ High Threshold.
The value over which an alarm will be triggered for this input, if configured to trigger alarms.
Nothing is displayed if the data point is not configured to trigger alarms.
‰ Deadband.
Indicates how much the value must go beyond the low or high threshold to trigger an alarm.
Nothing is displayed if the data point is not configured to trigger alarms.
When a binary inputs or binary outputs branch is selected, the right pane displays the following information for each binary input:
SMP Gateway User Manual
16.6.7
‰ Name.
The input’s name.
‰ State.
The input’s actual state.
‰ Alarm.
Indicates it this input is in alarm (1), or not (0). Nothing is displayed if the data point is not configured to trigger alarms.
‰ Filter(s).
The appearance and disappearance filters, which respectively indicates how long, in milliseconds, the binary input must keep the active state (TRUE or 1) before triggering an alarm, and how long, in milliseconds, the binary input must keep the inactive state (FALSE or
0) before considering that the alarm is no longer active. Nothing is displayed if the data point is not configured to trigger alarms.
Statistics branches/pages are quite similar to those available through the SMP Stats tool. For more
information about statistics and the SMP Stats tool, see “Viewing Communications Statistics in
Performing Control Operations From a Readings Page
As seen previously in the “Creating a User-Defined Readings Page” section, page 140, you can
create touch buttons that allow operators to perform control operations.
When you press such a button, a modal window appears over the Annunciator’s main display.
SMP Gateway User Manual
•
159
This window is also customizable, as described in the same section. In the snapshot above, the
State 0
button is named
Open
and the
State 1
button is named
Close
.
To perform a control operation:
‰ Press either the State 0 or State 1 button:
‰ To force the corresponding output to state 0 (FALSE), press the State 0 button.
‰ To force the corresponding output to state 1 (TRUE), press the
State 1
button.
‰ Press Cancel to close this window without forcing the output’s state.
The control operation window is replaced by a confirmation window.
16.6.8
‰ Press Execute to proceed with the control operation’s execution.
‰ Press Cancel to close this window without executing the control operation.
‰ If you pressed Execute , two entries will be added to the history log: one to indicate that a control operation has been performed on the given binary output, and another to indicate the result. The same entries, and more precise information, are also stored in the
Control
log file, which can be accessed using the SMP Log tool. For more information about this tool, see
“Viewing the SMP Log Files”, page 47.
‰ If you press Cancel , the window is closed and no control operation is performed.
Using the Screen Saver
A screen saver can be configured to replace the Annunciator’s display by a black screen during periods of inactivity.
To learn how to set up the screen saver, see “Setting Up a Screen Saver using SMP Config”, page 150.
To leave screen saver mode, just touch the screen.
160
•
SMP Gateway User Manual
The screen saver also automatically ends its execution when an alarm occurred, or when the data point that triggered it return to its normal condition.
SMP Gateway User Manual
•
161
17 The SMP Gateway’s
Automation Functions
Because it is connected between the substation devices and the control centers, the SMP Gateway is well positioned to implement advanced processing functions that would be impossible to perform by less sophisticated devices.
The SMP Gateway provides the following automation capabilities:
‰ The SMP Automation Functions module, which add basic automation functions.
See “The SMP Gateway Automation Functions Module”, next.
‰ The Soft PLC module and CoDeSys development platform, which allow the creation of sophisticated automation scripts, such as closing circuit breakers and load balancing.
”
17.1 The SMP Gateway Automation Functions
Module
The SMP Gateway Automation Functions module is an optional software package designed to extend the capabilities of existing devices by adding local automation capabilities similar to what could be implemented using an external PLC. The module adds the following functions to the
SMP Gateway:
‰ The Analog Control function, which performs a control operation on a physical analog output point, based on the value change of a physical input point. Basically, it writes the value of an input point to an output. A deadband value, in engineering units, can be specified so that only changes that exceed the deadband value will trigger a control operation. A time filter, in milliseconds, can be applied to value changes of the source point, to prevent control operations from being triggered on transitions of short duration.
‰ The Best Of function, which makes a logical input or output point an exact replica of the best source point available of the same type. The evaluation of the best source point is based on quality. An exact replica involves the support for redundant devices: value or state, the quality and the timestamp. Furthermore, if the “best of” operation involves output points, the requested command is sent to the best source point.
SMP Gateway User Manual
•
163
17.1.1
‰ The
Binary Control
function, which performs a control operation on a binary output point, based on the state change of a binary input point . A millisecond time filter can be applied to value changes in the source point, to prevent control operations from being triggered on transitions of short duration.
‰ The
Binary Debouncing function is the answer to a typical binary signals problem, by filtering short-term transitions, considered as non-significant.
‰ The Create function, allows you to create a logical analog or binary input point that acts as a data holder. The only way to modify the data point is by using a Force operation, using the
Force function. A validity delay can be specified to define a refresh period after which the value of the created point must be refreshed to maintain a valid status. If the value is no longer refreshed using the Force function after this delay, the point inherits the bad quality status.
This function, in conjunction with the Force function, allows a slave to update a input point value (binary or analog) that can be read by any other slave.
‰ The Force function, which forces the value or state of an analog or binary input point, based on control operations performed on force and unforce output points created by the function.
‰ The Grouped Control function, which performs a control operation on a group of output points, based on the value or state change of an analog or binary control point.
‰ The Inhibition function, which uses a logical output point to control a group of physical output points for the purpose of enabling or disabling control functions. This function can also be used with physical input points, in which case it enables or disables reporting of transitions for those points.
‰ The Input Latching and Reset function, which changes the state of a logical input point, called a latched point, whenever it detects a transition or pulse on a physical binary input point. The latched point remains “on” until either a reset operation is done on a binary output reset point or an internal timer expires. Optionally, the control operation on the reset point can also apply to a physical binary output point called the controlled point.
‰ The Logical function, which dynamically computes an “AND” or “OR” operation on a group of binary input points. The result of this computation is stored in a logical binary input point.
‰ The Logic Processor defines logical data points which values are based on calculations performed on physical points that you build in the Logic Editor , to process existing points through different operations described further. It is a much more elaborated version of the
Logical function.
Adding an Automation Functions Instance
Proceed as follows to add an Automation Functions instance using SMP Config :
‰ In the left pane, click Automation Functions, under Master Protocols.
‰ In the right pane, assign a name to the new instance.
‰ The new instance appears in the left pane.
164
•
SMP Gateway User Manual
17.1.2
‰ As shown in the screenshot, the newly added instance includes the following items:
‰
‰
‰
General settings, which set the general behavior of the component.
Settings for various data point types. Initially, there are no data points. You will create logical data points for each function you set up. You will then specify the settings for each of these logical data points.
Functions. All the currently supported functions appear in the list. You will define specific functions of these various types, and these functions will refer to logical data points.
‰ In the left pane, click General .
‰ Type a prefix in the right pane. This prefix must be unique for each Automation Functions.
Defining an Automation Function
Each instance includes one or more automation functions, such as Best Of , Force , Create , and so on. The procedure next shows you how to define a Best Of function, but the process is similar for all the various types of functions.
‰ In the left pane, under Functions , click Best Of .
The right pane shows the settings you need to enter for the Best Of function.
SMP Gateway User Manual
•
165
166
•
The Best Of function makes a logical input or output point an exact replica of the best source point available of the same type. The logical point is referred to as the “result point”.
‰ In the right pane, type a name for the function.
‰ Define the result point:
‰
‰
‰
‰
In the left pane, click the type of data point you want for the result point. For the benefit of the example, click
Analog Inputs
, and then on
Logical Inputs
. Thus, the result point will be a logical analog input point.
In the right pane, type a name of your choice for the result point. Let us call it “Best Of
Result Point”, and enter its settings: scale, offset, units, etc.
In the left pane, click again on
Best Of
.
In the right pane (see previous screenshot), choose “Best Of Result Point” in the Result
Point drop-down list.
‰ Define the first source point:
‰ Type the name of the point in the
First Point
box.
Or,
‰
‰
‰
‰
Put the cursor in the First Point box.
In the Tools menu, click Select Points .
In the
Select Points
dialog box, choose the first source point to which you want to subscribe. This point has to be an analog input point, to match the data point type of the result point. In our example, we selected an analog input point on a DNP3 device. This point represents the phase A current.
Click Paste to have the point appear in the First Point box.
SMP Gateway User Manual
‰ Define the second source point:
‰ Type the name of the point in the Second Point box.
Or,
‰
‰
‰
Without closing the dialog box, put the cursor in the Second Point box.
In the Select Points dialog box, choose the second source point to which you want to subscribe. This point also has to be an analog input point, to match the data point type of the result point. In our example, we chose an analog input point on a MODICON
MODBUS device, which represents the phase A current, as did the DNP3 point.
Click Paste to have the point appear in the Second Point box.
‰ Type a description of the automation function, if you like.
The screen is shown next.
The Best Of function will choose the better of the 2 source points, and put the result in the result point.
Note : In the example, we subscribed to device data points, but we could have subscribed to any data point available in the SMP Gateway.
SMP Gateway User Manual
•
167
17.1.3
17.1.4
Understanding Automation Functions Settings
Complete documentation on the automation functions is available in the Application Notes folder of the SMP Gateway Software & Tools CD-ROM, in a document called SMP Automation
Functions .
Using the Logic Processor
SMP Config enables you to derive a data point through a mathematical expression that includes existing data points.
For instance, you may want to export the value of a certain power aspect such as phase imbalance but no such data point is available. If data points are available for voltage and current, you can simply define three new data points calculated as the voltage times the current for each phase, then check power imbalance between the three points.
The expression for deriving a calculated data point can be evaluated in one of two ways:
‰ By exception .
Whenever there is a transition on the data points included in the expression. If you choose this option, you also specify whether the evaluation is to be triggered by a specific data point or by any data point in the expression.
‰ Periodically .
Every X milliseconds.
You can choose to have the expression evaluated either by exception or periodically, or both. If you choose both, the expression will be evaluated once every X milliseconds as well as anytime there is a transition on a data point or signal used in the expression. If you do not choose either method, the expression will be evaluated only once, on the SMP Gateway’s startup.
Note : This function is not available for the SMP 4-20 and the SMP 8-40.
To create a calculated data point:
‰ In the left pane, at the bottom of the automated functions list, expand Functions and rightclick Logic Processor .
‰ In the shortcut menu, select Logic Editor .
SMP Config displays the Logic Editor dialog box.
168
•
SMP Gateway User Manual
The Logic Editor is used to enter the expression that generates the value of the calculated data point. It is displayed across several windows, which allow you to set the attributes of the calculated data point and assist you in editing the expression.
Use the toolbar at the top of the dialog box to validate, save and close the expression, or to undo the last change to the expression.
The table below describes the various areas of the dialog box:
Window Description
Properties Used to specify the different attributes of the calculated data point. These attributes are described in the sections below.
Data Points Used to select and enter existing data points in the expression. You can select data points from the list of available data points. These are grouped together in folders, based on grouping criteria that you established with the
Group Settings tab of the
Display Options
dialog.
Functions
Operators
If you open the various folders, you will note that binary points are displayed in blue, while analog points are displayed in green.
The list is a memory jogger for selecting I/O points to be used in the expression.
Double-click on an item to insert it at the cursor location in the expression window.
Displays the list of all the functions that can be inserted in the expression.
Double-click on an item to insert it at the cursor location in the expression window. The various functions are described in the sections below.
Displays the list of all the operators, constants and variables that can be inserted
SMP Gateway User Manual
•
169
170
•
Window Description in the expression. Double-click on an item to insert it at the cursor location in the expression window. The various operators are described in the sections below.
Expression
(empty window at the bottom of the application window)
Used to enter and edit the expression to be evaluated. You can type the expression directly or use the memory-jogging windows described above.
The result of the evaluation of the expression is assigned as the value of the calculated data point.
A calculated data point has the following properties:
Properties Description
Produced point Resulting data point.
Name
Description
Timestamp
Quality
Time-based
Time interval (ms)
By exception
Specific trigger
Triggered by
Name of the calculated data point for which the expression is currently being edited. This field cannot be edited. To edit an expression for another calculated data point, close the editor and select another data point in one of the analog or binary point pages in the
Site
view.
Optional space for you to type a description of the new point.
Defines how the calculated data point is to be time-stamped. Specify "Server" if you want the system time to be used as the timestamp, and specify "Triggered point" if you want the timestamp to be the time of the point that triggered the calculation.
By default, the calculated data point is time-stamped by the
SMP Gateway
.
Specifies whether the quality of the calculated data point will always be good, or will depends the quality of its source point(s)
If you select
Use source quality
, as soon as the quality of one of the source points is bad, the calculated data point’s quality will also be bad.
Specifies whether the expression is to be evaluated on a periodic basis. The time interval is then specified via the
Time interval
attribute. Normally, expressions are not evaluated on a periodic basis.
Specifies that the expression is to be evaluated every X milliseconds. This time interval applies only if the Time-based attribute specifies "Yes". The minimum value is 50 ms. If this condition is
Specifies whether the expression is to be evaluated whenever there is a transition on one of the data points or signals in the expression.
Specifies whether the evaluation of the expression is to be triggered by a single data point ("Yes") or by any data point ("No") in the expression. This attribute is ignored if By exception is set to "No".
Used to specify the name of the data point or signal that will trigger the evaluation of the expression. This attribute is ignored if
Specific trigger
is set to "No".
SMP Gateway User Manual
17.1.4.1
17.1.4.2
17.1.4.3
Data Point Names in Expressions
To use a data point in an expression, simply type the name of the data point. Make sure to include the prefix, if applicable.
A data point name used in an expression must adhere to the following Visual Basic-like notation:
‰ It must begin with a letter.
‰ It can include alphanumeric characters (A-Z, a-z, 0-9), the underscore separator " _ " (without the quotes), and special characters, such as a period.
If the data point name contains a special character, it must be surrounded by the delimiter character " (the quotation mark). For example, a physical data point name of T5.APHA must be declared as "T5.APHA".
Here are some examples of valid expressions:
120 + ( CurrentPoint * 0.02 * ( Rand() - 1 ) )
( 0.85 "T5.APHA" * "T5.KVAB" ) / 1000
"1B17.MA" AND ("120-1.MA" AND NOT "120-1.MB" ) AND "1B1.MA"
Imbalance("T5.APHA", "T5.APHB", "T5.APHC")
Comments in Expressions
Expressions can span several lines. To insert a comment into an expression, put a single quote at the beginning of the line.
For instance:
' Calculates the imbalance of transformer #5
Imbalance("T5.APHA", "T5.APHB", "T5.APHC")
Condition Statements
You can use the following condition statements in expressions:
Statement Description
If <condition> Then
<expression>
Endif
Evaluates the specified expression if the logical condition is true.
If <condition> Then
<true expression>
Else
<false expression>
Endif
Evaluates the expression specified after the "THEN" if the logical condition is true, or evaluates the expression specified after the "ELSE" if the logical condition is false.
Note that the expression can contain several embedded IF and
ELSE statements, in which case each ELSE statement is associated with the IF statement closest to it.
SMP Gateway User Manual
•
171
17.1.4.4
17.1.4.5
Mathematical Functions
You can use the following built-in mathematical functions in expressions:
Function Description
Abs( x ) Calculates the absolute value of x .
Pow( x, y )
Sqrt( x )
Exp( x )
Log( x )
Sin( x )
Cos( x )
Tan( x )
ArcSin( x )
ArcCos( x )
ArcTan( x )
Min( x, y )
Max( x, y )
Calculates the value of x to the power of y .
Calculates the square root of x .
Calculates the value of e raised to the power of x .
Calculates the logarithm of x to the base 10.
Calculates the sine of angle x , expressed in radians.
Calculates the cosine of angle x , expressed in radians.
Calculates the tangent of angle x , expressed in radians.
Calculates the arcsine of angle x .
Calculates the arccosine of angle x .
Calculates the arctangent of angle x .
Compares the values of x and y , and retains the lesser of the two.
Compares the values of x and y , and retains the greater of the two.
Data Point Functions
You can use the following built-in data point functions in expressions.
Function Description
Imbalance( point A, point B, point C
)
Calculates the imbalance among three phases, for the current represented by the three data point names.
IsEqual( point1, point2, precision )
The calculation is defined as follows for a three-phase current:
((Imax - Imin) / Iavg) * 100 where:
Iavg = (AI + AB + IC) / 3
Imax = max (IA, IB, IC)
Imin = min (IA, IB, IC)
Compares point1 and point2 , to the nearest precision significant digits.
The expression evaluates to TRUE or FALSE, depending on whether or not point1 = point2 .
172
•
SMP Gateway User Manual
17.1.4.6
IsTrigger( point )
QualityOf( point )
TimestampOf( point )
BAD_QUALITY
Evaluates to TRUE if the specified point causes the expression to be reevaluated.
Evaluates to TRUE if the value of the specified data point is valid.
Returns the timestamp of a point, as a number of milliseconds that have elapsed since an internal reference date and time. Use this function for the sole purpose of comparing timestamps that were obtained via a previous call to the TimestampOf() function.
Sets the quality of a data point to BAD, which means that the value of the data point cannot be assumed as valid.
Generators
You can use the following built-in generators in expressions. Generators are used to mathematically generate input values for data points.
Generator Description
Sine( amplitude, frequency, phase ) Generates an expression of the form: Sine( A, f, P ).
Calculates the value of a sinusoid with an amplitude A , a frequency f in hertz, and an initial phase P in degrees. P is optional and if you don't specify it, it will be assigned a value of
0.
Pulse( amplitude, frequency, duty cycle, delay )
Generates an expression of the form: Pulse( A, f, dc, d ).
Calculates the value of a pulse stream with an amplitude A , a frequency f in hertz, a duty cycle cd in percent, and a delay of d milliseconds. d is optional and if you don't specify it, it will be assigned a value of 0.
Saw( amplitude, frequency, delay ) Generates an expression of the form: Saw( A, f, d ).
Randn( mean, variance )
Calculates the value of a sawtooth wave with an amplitude A , a frequency f in hertz, and a delay of d milliseconds. d is optional and if you don't specify it, it will be assigned a value of 0.
Generates an expression of the form: Randn( mean, var ).
Rand()
Calculates a random value with a normal distribution that has a mean value of mean and a variance of var .
Generates an expression of the form: Rand( ).
Calculates a random value with a uniform distribution ranging between 0.0 and 1.0.
SMP Gateway User Manual
•
173
17.1.4.7
17.1.4.8
Arithmetic Operators
You can use the following arithmetic operators in expressions:
Operator Description
+ [Add] Calculates the sum of the left and right operands.
- [Subtract]
* [Multiply]
/ [Divide]
( [Opening parenthesis]
) [Closing parenthesis]
Calculates the difference between the left and right operands.
Calculates the product of the left and right operands.
Divides the left operand by the right operand.
Expressions are evaluated according to standard operator precedence.
Parentheses are used to group sub-expressions and control the order in which expressions are evaluated.
1 + 2 * 3 evaluates to 7
(1 + 2) * 3 evaluates to 9
Expressions are evaluated according to standard operator precedence.
Parentheses are used to group sub-expressions and control the order in which expressions are evaluated.
1 + 2 * 3 evaluates to 7
(1 + 2) * 3 evaluates to 9
Binary Operators
Binary operators are used to manipulate the individual bits of expressions or data points.
You can use the following binary operators in expressions:
Operator Description
BAND Calculates a bitwise AND between the left and right operands.
For instance, 12 BAND 5 evaluates to 4 (1100 BAND 0101 is 0100).
BOR
BNOT
BXOR
BEQV
Calculates a bitwise OR between the left and right operands.
For instance, 12 BOR 5 evaluates to 13 (1100 BAND 0101 is 1101).
Calculates a bitwise NOT of the value to the right.
For instance, BNOT 0 evaluates to -1 (BNOT …0000 is …1111).
Calculates a bitwise XOR between the left and right operands.
For instance, 12 BXOR 5 evaluates to 9 (1100 BXOR 0101 is 1001).
Calculates a bitwise EQV between the left and right operands.
For instance, 12 BEQV 9 evaluates to 6 (1100 BEQV 0101 is 0110).
174
•
SMP Gateway User Manual
17.1.4.9 Logical Operators
Logical operators are used to combine the results of logical expressions such as comparisons.
You can use the following logical operators in expressions:
Operator Description
AND Evaluates to TRUE if the left and right operands are both TRUE.
OR
NOT
XOR
EQV
Evaluates to TRUE if either the left or right operand is TRUE.
Evaluates to TRUE if the value to the right is FALSE.
Evaluates to TRUE if the left and right operands have different values.
Evaluates to TRUE if the left and right operands have the same value.
17.1.4.10 Relational Operators
You can use the following relational operators in expressions:
Operator Description
< [Less than] Evaluates to TRUE if the left operand is less than the right operand.
> [Greater than] Evaluates to TRUE if the left operand is greater than the right operand.
<= [Less than or equal to]
Evaluates to TRUE if the left operand is less than or equal to the right operand.
>= [Greater than or equal to]
Evaluates to TRUE if the left operand is greater than or equal to the right operand.
= [Equal to]
!= [Not equal to]
Evaluates to TRUE if the left operand is equal to the right operand.
Evaluates to TRUE if the left operand is different from the right operand.
17.1.4.11 Constants and Variables
You can use the following built-in constants and pseudo-variables in expressions:
Operator Description
CurrentPoint [Point value]
Represents the current value, i.e., the value of the logical point being edited, just prior to its evaluation.
SMP Gateway User Manual
•
175
17.2 The Soft PLC
The Soft PLC is an optional software module available on all models. Using this module, you can create automation scripts that access the data points in the SMP Gateway’s real-time database in order to create sophisticated control functions.
Since the Soft PLC is part of the SMP Gateway’s internal architecture, the scripts you define can be used to:
‰ create new logical data points, with values based on the result of calculations performed on real data points;
‰ process data in real time before sending it to control centers;
‰ implement sophisticated local automation functions, such as automatic closing of circuit breakers and load balancing.
The Soft PLC module is provided with the CoDeSys development platform, a complete development environment that supports the IEC 61131 programming languages:
‰ Instruction List (IL)
‰ Structured Text (ST)
‰ Function Block Diagram (FBD)
‰ Continuous Function Chart (CFC)
‰ Ladder Diagram (LD)
‰ Sequential Function Chart (SFC)
17.2.1 The CoDeSys Development Environment
CoDeSys is one of the most popular IEC 61131-3 programming systems for PLCs and industrial controllers. It supports the full range of standard IEC 61131-3 data types, as well as user-defined data types: arrays, structures, enumerations, aliases and pointers. The tools provide a comfortable programming environment, with full debugging support. The following illustration presents
CoDeSys application’s main window.
176
•
SMP Gateway User Manual
17.2.2 Using CoDeSys to Create SMP Gateway Automation
Scripts
While a detailed description of how to create automation scripts is beyond the scope of this document, the process can be summarized in the following steps:
‰ Install the CoDeSys development system on your PC.
‰ Start CoDeSys and install the SMP Target Support Package . A Target Support Package
(TSP) contains all the files and configuration information necessary to control the
SMP Gateway from a program created in CoDeSys.
‰ Add the SMP Library to the CoDeSys project. This library contains all the information necessary to access the SMP Gateway components from a programming language.
‰ Create your automation script using one of the IEC 61131-3 programming languages.
‰ Connect the CoDeSys development platform to the SMP Gateway.
‰ Load the script on the SMP Gateway and use CoDeSys’ advanced debugging features to test and debug the script.
For complete details on using CoDeSys to create scripts for the SMP Gateway Soft PLC module, see the SMP Gateway PLC User Manual , GUI-00316-00003-T.
SMP Gateway User Manual
•
177
18 Using Syslog with an
SMP Gateway
Syslog is a method for delivering log information from a sender to a receiver, typically across an
IP network. Typically used for computer system management and security auditing, Syslog is supported by a wide variety of devices and receivers across multiple platforms. Because of this,
Syslog can be used to integrate log data from many different types of systems into a central repository. It is then possible for the system administrator to dispatch these messages to email or
SMS systems, for example.
The SMP Gateway’s Syslog component uses the UDP protocol to send its log entries to a single receiver. It is configured using SMP Config, and is active as soon as the SMP Gateway starts up.
For an overview of the messages that an SMP Gateway may send to a Syslog receiver, launch
SMP Log and take a look at the various log files’ contents.
If you need to know more, open SMP Log and look at the log's content. You can also refer to
section “Information Provided by SMP Log”, page 47.
The following section describes the few steps to follow to set up Syslog on your SMP Gateway.
18.1 Setting Up Syslog
Because it is based on the SMP Gateway’s own logger, the Syslog feature is easy to configure on an SMP Gateway. The receiver of the Syslog messages must first be specified. If needed, the facility qualifiers attached to messages can be customized to your needs.
To enable and configure the SMP Gateway’s Syslog, proceed as follows:
‰ From SMP Manager’s Tools menu, click SMP Config to open it.
‰ In the left pane, under your SMP Gateway's name, expand the
System
branch.
‰ Select the Syslog branch and type an appropriate name. In the following example, the name is
Main Syslog Server .
178
•
SMP Gateway User Manual
‰ Expand the branch you just created and select the General branch.
‰ Select the time zone used by the receiver server. If the server is configured for daylight saving time schedule adjustments, select the Auto Adjust DST checkbox.
‰ Select the Receiver branch. Type the server’s name and IP address. Leave both port numbers to their default value, which are set to 514.
‰ Select the
Facilities
branch. Assign, if needed, an appropriate facility code to each log file.
The default settings, as illustrated above, should satisfy your requirements.
Note: Facility codes are used to distinguish different classes of Syslog messages.
These codes are mainly useful for message classification.
SMP Gateway User Manual
•
179
19 Redundancy
The SMP Gateway is a critical component in a substation automation system. Hence, there are circumstances in which losing an SMP Gateway can severely impact substation operations. With the redundancy option, you can group 2 SMP Gateways together in a redundant configuration, to ensure continued operation of the substation automation system in the event of a failure. If one gateway fails, the other one takes over. There are different types of redundancies, as IEDs,
SMP Gateways and networks can be redundant in many combinations.
Redundant SMP Gateways are addressed by a SCADA center as if they were a single
SMP Gateway with a single IP address. In the event that one SMP Gateway fails, the second
SMP Gateway immediately becomes active and takes ownership of the logical IP address.
Failover from the active SMP Gateway to the standby SMP Gateway typically takes less than 5 seconds. Network connections from the control center are temporarily lost when the active gateway goes offline. The control center simply needs to reconnect to the same group IP address in order to re-establish a new connection and restore system operation.
An additional benefit is that you can update SMP Gateway settings with minimum down time, by updating the settings of the standby SMP Gateway, which will take over the other SMP Gateway during its own update.
Note : The redundancy function is not available on SMP 4.
19.1 Redundant Group Operation
In an SMP Gateway redundancy group, one SMP Gateway plays an active role while the other stands by. The active gateway polls the substation devices and responds to requests from control centers. The standby gateway initializes itself, places its serial links in a high-impedance state and waits to become active.
The active SMP Gateway uses a special protocol to send regular heartbeat messages to the standby
SMP Gateway. If the standby SMP Gateway fails to receive these messages, it automatically assumes that it should become active. 2 distinct communications channels are used for the heartbeat messages, to minimize the chances of both SMP Gateways becoming active due to a single faulty connection. These channels can be LAN connections, dedicated serial connections, or a mixture of both.
The 2 SMP Gateways in a group must have identical configurations and be physically connected to the same substation devices. The active SIOM, which comes as an option with the SMP 4-20
SMP Gateway User Manual
•
181
19.1.1
and SMP 8-40, also supports redundancy and can therefore be used to connect serial devices to 2 redundant SMP 4-20s or SMP 8-40s.
Redundant IEDs
When needed, breakers can be monitored and controlled by multiple protection relays to make sure that a fault is always detected; normally different relays from different manufactures are used.
To report only one data set to the control center the SMP Gateway has the “best of” automation
function (see “The SMP Gateway Automation Functions Module
”
ACQUISITION OVER TWO
LINKS TO TWO DEVICES.
INFORMATION FROM
PRIMARY SOURCE IS
PREFERED.
SECONDARY SOURCE
INFORMATION IS USED.
TRYING TO RESTORE COMM.
WITH PRIMARY SOURCE.
INFORMATION FROM
PRIMARY SOURCE IS
PREFERED.
COMMUNICATION
FAILURE
COMMUNICATION
RESTORE
19.1.2
You should know that:
‰ The “best of” automation function is protocol independent.
‰ It is a per-point redundancy, allowing any failure in the acquisition path.
‰ Connection with two links to the same device can also be done. However, this achieves almost the same as the Master link redundancy but with more configuration effort.
‰ When both IEDs have the same data map, a redundant master can be used instead of a
“best of” configuration.
The main advantage of the “best of” function over master link redundancy is that the “best of” allows the mixing of different devices. On the other hand, the disadvantage is the size of the configuration, as 3 points are needed to get the data from a single input/output: 2 master points and 1 best of point.
Giving Priority to an SMP Gateway of the Group
It is possible to give one of the SMP Gateways the priority; the SMP Gateway that has priority will become active when there are no error conditions. This setting will cause an additional failover when the SMP Gateway that has priority recovers from a fault. This is explained in the following sections.
182
•
SMP Gateway User Manual
19.2 Grouping 2 SMP Gateways for Redundancy
Basic SMP Gateway redundancy consists of an active SMP Gateway and a standby
SMP Gateway. The active gateway is polling the devices and communicates with the control center as if it was a stand-alone system. The active and standby gateways are communicating with each other so that when the active gateway fails, the standby one becomes active.
Both SMP Gateways share a public IP address to which the control center can connect. This ensures that no special network configuration is needed at the control center; in fact, when the control center connects to the public IP-address, it has no indication which gateway is active and which one is on standby. In the following example, SMP Gateways 10.2.15.1 and 10.2.15.2 are grouped under the public IP address 10.2.15.3.
10.2.15.1
10.2.15.3
10.2.15.2
10.2.15.1
10.2.15.3
10.2.15.2
10.2.15.1
10.2.15.3
10.2.15.2
STANDBY
SMP
FAILURE ACTIVE
SMP
RESTORED ACTIVE STANDBY ACTIVE
19.2.1
You should know that:
‰ Each SMP Gateway has its own private IP address.
‰ Both SMP Gateways share a public IP address which is assigned to the active gateway.
‰ Basic failover condition is the detection of a hardware failure on the active
SMP Gateway.
‰ Serial devices are connected to both SMP Gateways through Y-cables.
‰ The standby SMP Gateway can still be accessed by its private IP address for maintenance.
‰
It is possible to force a failover, as explained in section 19.3.1, page 188.
‰ Both SMP Gateways must have the same configuration.
Setting Up a Redundancy Group Using SMP Manager
You will use
SMP Manager
to create an SMP Gateway redundancy group. The sections that follow provide an overview of the configuration process.
To create a redundancy group:
‰ In the SMP Manager window, choose the 2 SMP Gateways you want to group together. Note that they must be of the same model and have the same configuration file currently loaded.
Select one SMP Gateway, and use the mouse and the SHIFT or CTRL key on your keyboard, as for any standard Windows selection, to select the second SMP Gateway.
SMP Gateway User Manual
•
183
‰ From the
Redundancy
menu, click
Group SMP Gateways to display the
Group Properties dialog box.
184
•
The Group Properties dialog box allows you to specify redundancy settings such as the virtual IP address, the LAN and serial connections to be used, and the conditions that have to exist for the
SMP Gateways to switch roles.
Redundancy is defined by 3 categories of settings, corresponding to the tabs in the dialog box.
‰ In the General settings tab, you identify the basic properties of the group:
‰ The keep-alive settings, i.e., the frequency at which keep-alive messages are to be sent by the active SMP Gateway (every x milliseconds, where x is between 200 and 10,000), and the timeout interval after which the standby SMP Gateway presumes that the active gateway has failed and takes over as the active one (between 600 and 30,000 ms).
‰ The virtual address and subnet mask used to communicate with the group. The virtual IP address must be different from the physical IP addresses you set up during the initial configuration of your SMP Gateways. It identifies the group and is used by the control center to communicate with the active gateway. If the active gateway fails, the virtual IP address and subnet mask are assigned to the standby gateway.
‰ Optionally, the virtual address and subnet mask of the secondary network, if you are using a secondary network for communication between the SMP Gateways and the control center.
‰ Optionally, you can give priority to one of the SMP Gateways: if neither SMP is in a failure state, the one that has priority will become active.
SMP Gateway User Manual
The
Links
tab is used to specify the 2 connections that will be used to link the redundant
SMP Gateways to each other.
These can be any combination of LAN or serial connections. The SMP 4-20 supports 1 LAN connection, while the SMP 8-40 and the SMP 16 can support 2. The active SMP Gateway uses these links to send regular heartbeat messages to the standby SMP Gateway. If the standby gateway fails to receive the messages, it automatically assumes that it should become active. 2 distinct communications links are used, in order to minimize the chances of both SMP Gateways becoming active due to a single faulty connection.
‰ In the Links tab, you identify:
‰ The type of first connection: LAN or serial.
‰ The type of the second connection: LAN or serial.
‰ The communication mode, either RS-232 or RS-422, if you are using one or more serial connections between the 2 SMP Gateways.
Note: To link two SMP Gateways using RS-232, use a standard null modem cable; using RS-422, use a standard null modem cable only if the SMP Gateways are SMP 16. A special cable is required if the linked gateways are SMP 4-20 or SMP 8-40; see the SMP 4-20 SMP 8-40 Installation Guide, GUI-316-027
T , for details.
A failover will automatically happen if the active SMP Gateway faces a major problem, such as a power failure, that prevents it from sending heartbeat messages.
SMP Gateway User Manual
•
185
186
•
‰ The Failover tab defines optional conditions that will trigger a failover such as:
‰ The system available memory falls below a defined threshold.
‰ Low-voltage alarm detected on the unit power supply.
‰ For 16/CP-PM and 16/SG-PM, SMP 8-40, 4-20, a high-temperature alarm.
‰ The unit’s network connections failed.
‰ Click OK . SMP Manager sends the settings to both SMP Gateways. You will need to restart both SMP Gateways to activate redundancy.
‰ In the
Restart Gateway dialog box, choose
Shutdown and Restart
to have the
SMP Gateways restart in normal mode.
The next screenshot shows two grouped SMP Gateways in SMP Manager:
SMP Gateway User Manual
19.2.2 SMP Manager’s Redundancy Column
The Redundancy column shows the current state of each SMP Gateway within a redundancy group. In the previous section’s example, the second SMP Gateway is on hot standby. This happens if the data points of the devices connected to the SMP Gateways have been configured for
hot standby (for details, see “Hot Standby”, page 191). There can be several intermediate states,
such as “initial”, “listen” or “speak”, while the grouping takes place. Thereafter, the following states may be displayed:
‰ Active .
Indicates that this SMP Gateway is active. It communicates with the field devices and sends
“keep alive” messages at a frequency set through parameter settings. In the event of a failover, it becomes the standby SMP Gateway.
‰ Standby.
Indicates that this SMP Gateway is on standby. It listens for “keep alive” messages from the active SMP Gateway and takes over as the active SMP Gateway if the latter fails to send a message within the expected number of milliseconds.
‰ Hot Standby .
Indicates that this SMP Gateway is on hot standby. It listens for “keep alive” messages from the active SMP Gateway. It also synchronizes all the data points that have been set up for hot standby in SMP Config
. See “Hot Standby”, page 191, for more information about this
particular redundancy feature.
‰ Partial Hot Standby
.
Indicates that this SMP Gateway is on hot standby (see above), but that the SMP Gateways have different configuration files.
When nothing is displayed, SMP Manager is not able to communicate with the SMP Gateway for one of the following reasons:
‰
‰
‰
The SMP Gateway’s redundancy software is not running because you have not set its redundancy parameters.
The redundancy software has not been installed correctly on the SMP Gateway.
The SMP Gateway is down.
This column may also advise you of exceptional situations, as described here:
‰ Peer IP: nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn
.
Indicates that one SMP Gateway of the group is not present in the SMP Gateway list of
SMP Manager. To fix the problem, simply add the second gateway to the list.
‰ Too Many SMPs .
There are more than 2 SMP Gateways in this redundancy group. To fix the problem, remove the excess SMP Gateways.
‰ Different parameters .
The 2 SMP Gateways in this group do not have the same redundancy settings.
To fix the problem, take the following steps:
‰ Click one or both SMP Gateways.
‰ From the Redundancy menu, click Group Properties .
SMP Gateway User Manual
•
187
‰ A warning message appears, telling you that
SMP Manager
will use the default redundancy settings and asking you if you want to go on. If you reply in the affirmative, the Group Properties dialog box appears and you can change the settings to your liking.
When you close the dialog box, both SMP Gateways will have the same settings.
‰ Restart both SMP Gateways to activate the parameters. For each gateway:
‰ Select the SMP Gateway to restart.
‰ From the Gateway menu, click Restart .
‰ From the Restart Gateway dialog box, click Shutdown and Restart .
Warning: Do NOT reset the SMP Gateways by pressing the reset button on the gateway itself, or you will lose your parameter settings.
‰ Peer IP: nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn => Not in redundancy.
The Peer IP is in the SMP Gateway list, but is not part of the redundancy group. This can happen if one of the 2 SMP Gateways in the group lose its redundancy configuration.
To fix the problem, ungroup the SMP Gateway that is still in the redundancy group (see
“Ungrouping SMP Gateways”, page 189) and regroup both gateways again.
‰ Virtual gateway (IP: nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn) .
You have added, to the SMP Gateway list, an SMP Gateway with the virtual IP address you assigned as the public IP address of the redundancy group. The address of the active gateway is indicated in parentheses.
The redundancy configuration of all SMP Gateways in the list is retrieved cyclically. This mechanism allows you to see the current redundancy state of all SMP Gateways, on SMP
Manager ’s main screen. Since the refresh cycle is relatively slow, the redundancy configuration of a given SMP Gateway is automatically retrieved when the SMP Gateway is added to the list, when it is restarted, and when one or more files are sent to it.
You can refresh the redundancy state of all SMP Gateways as follows:
‰ From the
View menu, click
Refresh
.
19.3 Managing Redundancy
19.3.1 Forcing an Active SMP Gateway to Fall On Standby
To force an active SMP Gateway to fall on standby, proceed as follows:
‰ Using SMP Manager, select the active SMP Gateway in the list.
‰ From the Redundancy menu, click Force Standby .
The selected SMP Gateway will enter standby mode, while the other SMP Gateway in the group will enter active mode.
188
•
SMP Gateway User Manual
19.3.2
19.3.3
19.3.4
19.3.5
Additional Failover Conditions
It is possible to define additional failover conditions to have a better control of which
SMP Gateway is active. The failover conditions are defined in the SysServerConfig.txt file and that file can be uploaded to the SMP Gateway as any other file. In this file, 16 additional error conditions can be defined which will force a failover. An example file was copied on your computer’s hard drive during the SMP Tools’ installation, at the following location:
\Program Files\Cybectec\SMP Tools\Documentation\Application notes .
Modifying the Redundancy Settings of an Existing Group
To modify the redundancy settings of an existing group of SMP Gateways, proceed as follows:
‰ In the SMP Gateway list, select one or both SMP Gateways of the group.
‰ From the Redundancy menu, click Group Properties.
‰ Modify the desired settings in the Group Properties dialog box. For a complete definition of
the settings, refer to the “Setting Up a Redundancy Group Using SMP Manager” section, page
Ungrouping SMP Gateways
To separate 2 SMP Gateways that had been grouped together for redundancy, proceed as follows:
‰ In the SMP Gateway list, select both SMPs.
‰ From the Redundancy menu, click Ungroup SMP Gateways.
Testing and Validating the Configuration
SMP Manager displays the current state of both SMP Gateways in a redundancy group. You can also use SMP Log and SMP Trace to display additional information.
Using SMP Log with both SMP Gateways:
‰ Verify in the Redundancy folder that one SMP Gateway is stated as active, and that the other one is stated as “on standby”, waiting for a failover.
For each SMP Gateway, using SMP Stats:
‰ In the System folder, open the Redundancy folder to view additional redundancy information and statuses.
SMP Gateway User Manual
•
189
19.3.6
19.3.7
Monitoring Redundancy Status
The GRP LED on the front panel of the SMP 16 displays the redundancy status, as does the ST2
LED on the front panel of the SMP 4-20 and SMP 8-40.
Refer to your SMP Gateway installation guide for details.
Testing a Redundant Network
So far, we have discussed SMP Gateway redundancy. However, with the SMP 16 and the SMP 8-
40, you can also set up network redundancy. The SMP Gateways and the control center can communicate via either network. Next figure illustrates a typical redundant network configuration, where the control center communicates with an SMP Gateway group through two subnetworks.
10.2.15.1
10.3.30.1
10.3.30.3
10.2.15.3
10.2.15.2
10.3.30.2
10.2.15.1
10.3.30.1
10.3.30.3
10.2.15.3
10.2.15.2
10.3.30.2
ACTIVE STANDBY
NETWORK
FAILURE ACTIVE STANDBY
190
•
SMP
FAILURE
10.2.15.1
10.3.30.1
10.3.30.3
10.2.15.3
10.2.15.2
10.3.30.2
ACTIVE
Note: Setting up a redundant network is out of the scope of this document. However, the following procedure describes how you can use the SMP Tools’ IP address switching feature to test a redundant network configuration.
Normally, the control center accesses the primary network and switches to the secondary network only if the primary network fails. You should therefore make sure the secondary network is working properly. To do this, you need to switch to the secondary IP address of your
SMP Gateway, and then run SMP Log and SMP Trace .To switch from the first IP address to the second IP address:
‰ From SMP Manager’s Tools menu, click Use Second Address.
Note that the switch to the second IP address applies not only to the SMP Gateway that is in the redundant network, but to all the gateways in the list. From this point on, if you launch
SMP Gateway User Manual
any SMP Tools, Telnet or Internet Explorer for any SMP Gateway, these applications will use the second IP address .
To switch back to the first IP address:
‰ From the Tools menu, click Use First Address.
Note that once a tool has been launched, it never switches IP addresses
regardless of how many times you toggle the address selection. Address switching applies only to commands that take place after you instruct SMP Manager to switch addresses.
Note further, that if there are other models in your SMP Gateway list that support only one IP address, such as the SMP 4 or the SMP 4-20, toggling back and forth between the first and second
IP address will have no effect. You will see the same logs, traces and statistics, regardless of which address you specify.
19.4 Hot Standby
The SMP Gateway software has the possibility to maintain a complete up-to-date image of the active SMP Gateway’s data on the standby SMP Gateway. This feature is called “hot standby”. It is available for the most common master protocols.
Whenever a transition occurs on a hot-standby data point, data point information is first updated in the real-time database of the active SMP Gateway; it is then transmitted to the standby
SMP Gateway, which updates its own database. Using hot standby, integrity scans are not always required, since the hot-standby data points are already synchronized, reducing the failover time significantly.
To configure a master protocol instance for hot standby, refer to the specific protocol manual found on the SMP Gateway Software & Tools CD-ROM.
To take full advantage of the hot standby, the slave protocol should be configured to be active anytime, even on standby. Proceed as follows:
‰ In SMP Config , select the General node of the slave protocol instance.
‰ Under
Hot-Standby Support
,
Disabled
should appear. Instead, select the slave component’s expected behavior between the following:
‰ Acquisition .
The slave protocol will receive data from its masters without accepting control commands from the control center.
‰ Acquisition and control.
The slave protocol will receive data from its masters and it will accept control commands from the control center. These commands will be forwarded to the active SMP Gateway, which will forward the control commands to the devices.
The following illustration presents the acquisition’s data flow for an SMP Gateway redundancy group that supports hot standby.
SMP Gateway User Manual
•
191
10.2.15.1
2
ACTIVE
3
10.2.15.3
10.2.15.2
3
HOT STANDBY
1
1.
The active SMP Gateway receives data from the device.
2.
The standby SMP Gateway is updated.
3.
Data is sent to the control center by both SMP Gateways.
Note: The public IP address is always associated with the active SMP Gateway. When the control center wants to connect to the standby SMP Gateway, it needs to use the physical IP address.
19.5 Teaming NICs for Network Fault Tolerance
(SMP 16 Only)
All SMP 16 models are equipped with two Network Interface Cards (NICs). You can group both NICs for network fault tolerance. This process is called NIC Teaming .
The SMP 16’s implementation of NIC Teaming cannot be used for load balancing. Its sole purpose is for network fault tolerance: if one NIC fails, the network connection does not cease and continues to operate on the other NIC.
To learn how to configure your SMP 16 for NIC Teaming, refer to the SMP 16 Installation
Guide , under the “Configuring your TCP/IP settings” section.
192
•
SMP Gateway User Manual
20 Setting Up the SNMP
Server
The SNMP server is an optional software module that allows the SMP Gateway to export statistics using the SNMP standard (Simple Network Management Protocol).
The SMP Gateway’s SNMP agent publishes and supports both standard MIBs (management information bases) that are supported by the Windows CE operating system and custom MIBs that are supported by the SMP Gateway application. The agent supports extensive “reading” capabilities as well as limited “writing” and “trap” capabilities.
20.1 SNMP Traps
SNMP traps are messages that are automatically sent to selected SNMP clients when specific, unusual events occur. They are the text equivalent of alarms. Traps are automatically sent to listening SNMP clients whenever:
‰ the SMP Gateway restarts;
‰ a communications link used by a master or slave protocol instance fails for more than 60 consecutive seconds (these traps are called link down traps);
‰ a communications link used by a master or slave protocol instance becomes active (these traps are called link up
traps).
In order to send traps, the SMP Gateway needs to know the IP addresses of the SNMP clients that are listening on the network. You can enter a maximum of 32 SNMP client IP addresses using the
SMP Gateway’s SNMP Manager .
20.2 Configuring the SNMP Server
To configure the SNMP server:
‰ Select the SMP Gateway in SMP Manager.
SMP Gateway User Manual
•
193
194
•
‰ Start a Telnet session:
‰ From the Tools menu, click Telnet .
‰ In the Telnet window that appears, type the following command: snmpmgr
SNMP manager lists all available commands, as shown next:
\> snmpgr
SNMP Manager
Available commands (case insensitive):
A Add a client.
R Remove a client.
L Display all clients.
M Modify the community membership of a client.
C Change a client description.
G Add a community.
D Remove a community.
B Display all communities and their permissions.
I Modify the permissions of a community.
T Modify the name of the system contact.
O Modify the location of the gateway on which the agent is running.
F List information on system contact and gateway location.
W Modify the firewall settings.
H Display the list of all commands.
esc Abort the current operation.
Q Quit.
You can display the previous list any time, by using the “H” command.
You should specify the SNMP settings in the following order:
‰ Add communities and their permissions.
‰ Add a system contact.
‰ Add a system location.
‰ Add a number of clients and associate them to communities.
Any modifications you make will go into effect the next time the SMP Gateway will restart.
SMP Gateway User Manual
21 Time Adjustment
This chapter describes the different time adjustment features of the SMP Gateway.
21.1 Monitoring Time Information
The SMP Gateway offers multiple ways to monitor the time information and statuses:
‰ Some system data points provide time information. They are all prefixed by “_smp___clock”
and are visible using the SMP Gateway’s web server (see “Using a Web Browser to View
Data in Real Time”, page 59). For more information on system data points and an exhaustive
list of time-specific points, see “System Data Points”, page 231.
‰ Current data and time can also be seen in SMP Stats, in the Vital System Information folder, from the Internals folder located in the System folder. For more information on
SMP Gateway statistics, see “Information Provided by SMP Stats ”, on page 56.
‰ SMP 16’s time information is displayed on the gateway’s front panel, using the SYNC LED.
For a complete description of the different SYNC LED states, refer to the gateway’s installation guide on the SMP Gateway Software & Tools CD-ROM.
‰ Also for the SMP 16 model, more precise time information can be seen in SMP Stats , in the
Clock
folder, from the
Internals
folder located in the
System
folder.
21.2 Setting SMP Gateway’s Internal Clock
The SMP Gateway has a real-time clock installed, with battery backup. It is set once during the installation. If the clock does not indicate the accurate time or was not set right, you can change it manually, using SMP Manager.
Note : If the SMP Gateway is synchronized by a GPS clock or any other external time source, setting time manually will not work.
To set the SMP Gateway’s clock using SMP Manager:
‰ Launch SMP Manager.
SMP Gateway User Manual
•
195
‰ Select the SMP Gateway for which you want to adjust time.
‰ From the Gateway menu, select Set Time . The Set Time dialog box will appear.
‰ Select whether the SMP Gateway’s clock will be set to UTC or Local Time .
‰ If you selected Local Time , select the time zone to use for the time conversion. Select Apply daylight saving time if needed.
Note: Daylight saving time automatic adjustment is not supported by the SMP Gateway.
If you use local time on your SMP Gateway, you must manually adjust the gateway’s internal clock at every DST clock shift.
‰ The time at which the clock will be set is displayed just above the buttons. If it is as expected, click OK to set the SMP Gateway’s clock to this date and time.
The SMP Gateway’s internal clock is not an atomic clock, which means that it drifts from actual time. Over time, data’s timestamps become less accurate. Moreover, manual time adjustment using SMP Manager displays an accuracy of ±1 second. Consequently, time adjustment via an external source is highly recommended for the SMP Gateway to provide accurate timestamps.
This is the topic of the next section.
21.3 Automatic Clock Adjustment
By configuring the SMP Gateway for automatic clock adjustment, you no longer have to worry about internal clock’s drifting. All I/O changes, logs, traces and other data provided by the
SMP Gateway are time-tagged with a greater degree of accuracy - typically one second or better.
There are four ways to adjust the internal clock automatically:
‰ Directly from a GPS signal, if you have an SMP 16 pre-installed with the GPS clock option.
You must then have a GPS antenna receiving the highly accurate satellite signal.
‰ Using an external source, such as an IRIG-B signal. It may come from another GPS antenna connected to another device that redistributes demodulated or modulated IRIG-B. It may also
196
•
SMP Gateway User Manual
21.3.1
come from another SMP 16 equipped with the GPS clock option that distributes IRIG-B to your SMP Gateway.
‰ Directly from an SNTP server. SNTP stands for Simple Network Time Protocol, and is briefly
presented in section “About GPS, IRIG-B and SNTP”, below.
‰ Using a SCADA protocol, such as DNP3.
Here is a list of the possible time adjustment solutions that are available for the different Cybectec
SMP Gateway types:
SMP Gateway model
SMP 4-20
Protocol
√
SNTP
√
Modulated
IRIG-B
Demodulated
IRIG-B GPS
O O -
SMP 8-40
SMP 4
SMP 16/CP
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
O
-
√
√
SMP 16/SG
Legend: O = With the SIOM option, G = with the SMP 16 GPS clock option.
O
-
√
√
-
-
G
G
Note: Only one time adjustment solution should be implemented at a time for an
SMP Gateway.
These different solutions are presented in the next sections.
About GPS, IRIG-B and SNTP
Global Positioning System (GPS) is a satellite-based navigation system operated and maintained by the U.S. Department of Defense (DoD). GPS uses a constellation of satellites to calculate the exact position and altitude of GPS receiver stations.
GPS technology requires a very accurate time source in order to calculate the orbital position of the satellites and determine the position of the receiver. To ensure the required level of accuracy, each GPS satellite is equipped with 4 atomic clocks that are kept in synchronization with the U.S.
Naval Observatory's Master Clock. Each satellite continuously transmits its current position and a time code. This time code can be used to synchronize the SMP Gateway, if equipped with the appropriate hardware.
IRIG-B is a military standard of the Inter Range Instrumentation Group. The best known IRIG standard is the IRIG Timecode standard used to timestamp video, film, telemetry, radar, and other data collected at test ranges. The main difference between the codes that are classified in letters from A to H is their bit rate, which varies between 1 pulse per second and ten thousand pulses per second. The IRIG-B standard operates at 100 pulses per second.
SMP Gateway User Manual
•
197
21.3.2
Note: IRIG-B signals come in two flavors: demodulated and modulated. Demodulated
IRIG-B signals cannot be carried over long distances while the modulated IRIG-B can be carried over distances larger than 350 meters (1000 feet) without degrading.
NTP stands for Network Time Protocol , and is a standard Internet protocol used to synchronize the clocks of computers to a time reference. NTP was originally developed by Professor David L.
Mills of the University of Delaware. As a full implementation of the NTP protocol seemed too complicated for many systems, a simplified version of the protocol was defined: SNTP (Simple
Network Time Protocol) . SNTP is basically NTP minus certain internal algorithms that are not required by all types of servers.
Configuring the SMP 16 GPS Clock Option
The SMP 16 GPS Clock uses the time information provided by the GPS system to provide a highly accurate time source for the substation.
Setting up the GPS clock option is explained in detail in the SMP 16 GPS Clock Option installation guide , GUI-316-47 which is included on the SMP Gateway Software & Tools CD-
ROM.
Some software configuration is required, using SMP Config:
‰ Under the System branch, select Time . If the Time instance has not been created yet, type a name in the blank Name text box, and then click again the Time branch.
‰ Under the Time instance branch, select the General branch.
‰ Under GPS Cable Length , type the total length, in meters, of the cable that links the
SMP Gateway to the GPS antenna.
21.3.3 Using IRIG-B for Internal Clock’s Adjustment
If your SMP Gateway supports IRIG-B and is not equipped with a GPS clock, the preferred time adjustment solution is to use an external IRIG-B time source.
Setting up IRIG-B is described in the installation guide of your SMP Gateway, which is included on the SMP Gateway Software & Tools CD-ROM.
198
•
SMP Gateway User Manual
21.3.4
If your IRIG-B source provides its time information as “local” time, instead of UTC, some software configuration is required on the SMP Gateway, as the gateway internally uses UTC.
Using SMP Config, proceed as follows:
‰ Under the System branch, select Time . If the Time instance has not been created yet, type a name in the blank Name text box, and then click again the Time branch.
‰ Under the Time instance branch, select the General branch.
‰ Under Security Time Zone , select the time zone of the IRIG-B source.
‰ Select the Auto Adjust DST checkbox if the IRIG-B source is automatically adjusted for daylight savings.
Setting Up the SMP Gateway as an SNTP Client
Another alternative is to configure the SMP Gateway as an STNP client.
To set up the SMP Gateway as an SNTP client:
‰ Launch SMP Config.
‰ Under the System branch, select SNTP . If the SNTP instance has not been created yet, type a name in the blank
Name
text box.
‰ Under the SNTP instance branch, select the Client branch.
‰ Select the Enabled checkbox.
‰ Type the Refresh rate, which is the frequency, in minutes, at which the SMP Gateway will connect to the SNTP server in order to be resynchronized.
‰ Type the Recovery Refresh rate, which is the frequency, in minutes, at which the
SMP Gateway will retry to connect to the SNTP server following a connection failure. This value must be smaller than the normal Refresh rate.
‰ Type the
Maximum Time Variance
allowed, which is the maximum difference allowed between the new time provided by the server and the actual time of the SMP Gateway. If the difference is larger, the time update is ignored.
SMP Gateway User Manual
•
199
21.3.5 Using a SCADA Protocol’s Time Adjustment Feature
When no external time source is available to the SMP Gateway, the SCADA or control center can itself serves as a time source, if the protocol it uses to communicates with the gateway supports time adjustment (synchronization). DNP3 and IEC 60870-5-104 are such protocols.
As each protocol has its own distinctive characteristics, refer to the protocol’s documentation found on the SMP Gateway Software and Tools CD-ROM to learn how to enable this protocolspecific feature.
21.4 Using the SMP Gateway as a Time Source
Following the August 2003 blackout, NERC has recommended that substation devices be synchronized using a GPS clock. When the SMP Gateway is synchronized by an accurate time source such as an external IRIG-B source or an internal GPS clock, it can distribute accurate time to substation devices in one of the following ways:
‰ Through a modulated or demodulated IRIG-B signal.
‰ By acting as an SNTP server.
‰ Using a master protocol, such as DNP3, IEC 60870-5-101 or IEC 60870-5-104. The accuracy may be limited by the protocol, but the overall synchronization of all the devices is typically accurate to within one second.
A slight delay may be introduced in the time information transmitted to devices. Output time accuracy is function of the type of time input used to adjust the SMP Gateway’s internal clock, and of the type of protocol or signal used to synchronize the devices. The resulting delays are presented in the following table.
Protocol output
Output Delay Accuracy (± ms)
SNTP output
Modulated
IRIG-B output
Demodulated
IRIG-B output
Protocol input
SNTP input
500
500
500
100
-
-
-
-
Modulated
IRIG-B input
Demodulated
IRIG-B input
GPS input
500
500
500
100
100
100
10
10
10
10
1
1
For example, if the SMP Gateway is time-adjusted using demodulated IRIG-B, a device’s clock adjusted by the gateway using demodulated IRIG-B may show a delay of ± 1 milliseconds. Note that the SMP Gateway can be more accurate: consider these values as “worst case scenarios”.
200
•
SMP Gateway User Manual
21.4.1
Also, the SMP Gateway does not perform accurate time-tagging when I/O changes are received from a device, because the transmission delay is unpredictable. For the time tag to be accurate, the device must time-tag the I/O changes itself.
The following sections present the various time distribution features of the SMP Gateway.
Configuring IRIG-B Time Distribution
IRIG-B time distribution is the ability, for an SMP Gateway, to distribute time adjustment information to various devices using IRIG-B signals.
Unlike using SNTP or a master protocol’s time adjustment feature, IRIG-B time distribution requires the SMP Gateway to be time-adjusted by a reliable source such as an IRIG-B signal or by
GPS.
Setting up IRIG-B is described in the installation guide of your SMP Gateway, which is included on the SMP Gateway Software & Tools CD-ROM.
Some additional configuration may be required, using SMP Config.
‰ If the SMP Gateway is time-adjusted using GPS:
‰ Under the
System
branch, select
Time
. If the Time instance has not been created yet, type a name in the blank Name text box, and then click again the Time branch.
‰ Under the Time instance branch, select the General branch.
‰ Under GPS IRIG-B Distribution , select the IRIG-B format to which you want the GPS time information to be converted.
Note : If the SMP Gateway is time-adjusted by an IRIG-B signal, the distributed IRIG-B signal will use the same IRIG-B format. For example, if the SMP Gateway’s input is an IEEE 1344 signal, the output will also be a IEEE 1344 signal.
If the SMP Gateway is part of a redundancy group, and you want it distribute time even while on standby:
‰ Under the System branch, select Time . If the Time instance has not been created yet, type a name in the blank Name text box, and then click again the Time branch.
‰ Under the Time instance branch, select the General branch.
‰ Select the Distribute IRIG-B Signal checkbox.
21.4.2 Setting Up the SMP Gateway to Act as an SNTP Server
If some devices can be configured as SNTP clients, the SMP Gateway can itself be configured to act as an SNTP server for these devices.
To configure the devices as SNTP clients, refer to each device’s user manual.
To set up the SMP Gateway as an SNTP server, proceed as follows:
SMP Gateway User Manual
•
201
‰ Open SMP Config.
‰ Under the System branch, select SNTP . If the SNTP instance has not been created yet, type a name in the blank Name text box.
‰ Under the SNTP instance branch, select the Server branch.
‰ Select the
Enabled
checkbox.
‰ Select from the Accessible From list box whether it will be accessible from any computer or a specific one.
‰ If you selected Specific computer or subnet , type an address or an address range in the last column.
21.4.3 Adjusting Devices Clocks Using Master Protocols
Some devices may not be able to retrieve information from an STNP server or an IRIG-B time source. However, if the communications protocols used by the SMP Gateway to communicate with these devices support some sort of time adjustment/synchronization feature, it can be used to adjust these devices’ clock.
As each protocol has its own distinctive characteristics, refer to the protocol’s documentation found on the SMP Gateway Software and Tools CD-ROM to learn how to enable this protocolspecific feature.
202
•
SMP Gateway User Manual
22 SMP Tools Remote Access to the SMP Gateway
You may want the SMP Tools to connect to an SMP Gateway that is not itself connected to your network. You would typically do this by setting up a dial-up connection and using a modem to call the SMP Gateway from your PC. Less typically, you might choose to access the SMP Gateway by setting up a direct serial connection between a serial port on your PC and a serial port or the console port on the SMP Gateway.
This section explains how to set up dial-up and direct serial connections between a personal computer and an SMP Gateway. The procedure differs slightly, depending on whether the
SMP Tools run under Windows XP or Windows 2000.
22.1 Windows XP Setup Procedures
If the SMP Tools run under Windows XP, use the procedures outlined in this section to:
‰ set up a dial-up (modem) connection between the PC and the SMP Gateway;
‰ set up a direct serial connection between the PC and the SMP Gateway.
22.1.1 Setting Up a Dial-Up (Modem) Connection
This section contains the procedure for setting up a dial-up (modem) connection between a PC running Windows XP, and an SMP Gateway.
If security features are activated on your SMP Gateway, you must first make sure your computer
is authorized to access the SMP Gateway (see “Sending the Security Database to One or More
SMP Gateways”, page 89) and that you selected the
Remote Access privilege for the Guests group in the Local Security Database Security Editor , accessible from SMP Manager’s
Security
menu.
•
203 SMP Gateway User Manual
204
•
You must perform the steps in the order presented in the table.
Step To do this
1
Set up the
SMP Gateway to accept a dial-up connection
2
Install the modem, if necessary
Follow these steps:
Perform this step for each SMP Gateway with which you want to communicate via modem.
1.
Start
SMP Manager
. Select the SMP Gateway to be configured and from the
File
menu, click
SMP Gateway Properties
. In the
Gateway Properties
dialog box, clear the
Automatically Poll SMP
Status at startup
check box. This will prevent polling on the dialup connection.
2.
From the
Tools
menu, click
Telnet
.
3.
Type RASMGR to start the RAS Manager application.
4.
Type “L”, to display the device list. The device list is actually the list of ports available on the SMP Gateway, including the console port.
5.
Type “M”, to modify the SMP Gateway’s COM port you intend to use for the dial-up connection.
6.
Type the number of the “MODEM device” to be modified. Note that you cannot specify the number of the console port, as the latter does not support modem connections.
7.
All the default settings should be correct, except for the last one:
Use
Device for Incoming Connections
. Type “Y” to allow incoming connections on the port and exit RASMGR.
8.
Press “Q” to exit RAS Manager, and then close the telnet window.
1.
From Windows’
Start
menu, access the
Control Panel
.
2.
Double-click Phone and Modem Options .
3.
In the
Phone and Modem Options
dialog box, click the
Modems tab.
If the modem you plan to use appears in the list, skip the rest of this step and proceed to the next item in the table, since your modem is already installed.
4.
Click
Add
.
5.
In the
Add Hardware Wizard
dialog box, allow Windows to detect your modem automatically, and then click
Next
.
SMP Gateway User Manual
Step
3
To do this Follow these steps:
6.
Insert the installation CD for the modem driver, if you have one.
7.
In the
Found New Hardware Wizard
dialog box, choose whether you want Windows to install the driver automatically or from a specific location and click Next .
8.
Once Windows advises you that it has installed the driver, click
Finish .
9.
Click
Finish
to close the
Add Hardware Wizard
dialog box.
10.
Click OK to close the Phone and Modem Options dialog box.
Set up a new dial-up (modem) connection for the
SMP Gateway
Perform this step for each SMP Gateway with which you want to communicate via modem.
1.
From Windows’
Start
menu, access the
Control Panel
.
2.
Double-click
Network Connections
.
3.
Double-click
New Connection Wizard
.
4.
In the New Connection Wizard dialog box, click Next .
5.
Select
Connect to the network at my workplace
and click
Next
.
6.
Select Dial-up connection and click Next .
7.
If your PC is only equipped with a single modem, skip this step.
Otherwise, select the modem you want to use for this connection, and click
Next
.
8.
Type a descriptive name for the connection and click Next .
9.
Type the phone number you will dial to connect to the SMP Gateway and click
Next
.
10.
If your PC is not equipped with a smart card slot, skip this step.
Otherwise, the wizard will ask you if you want the use a smart card to log you into the remote network. Select the option that suits you the most and click
Next
(by default, the
Do not use my smart card option is selected).
11.
Under
Create this connection for
, select
Anyone’s use
, click
Next and click
Finish
.
12.
In the
Connect <Connection Name> dialog box, click
Properties
.
13.
From the
General
tab, select the modem you want to use for this connection and click
Configure
.
14.
In the Modem Configuration dialog box, select the Enable hardware flow control
checkbox, the
Enable modem error control checkbox and the Enable modem compression checkbox.
15.
Click the
Networking
tab, and then click
Settings
.
16.
If you are using an SMP 4-20 or an SMP 8-40:
In the PPP Settings dialog box, clear the Enable LCP extensions checkbox, the
Enable software compression
checkbox, and the
Negotiate multi-link for single link connections checkbox. Click
OK
.
If you are using an SMP 4 or an SMP 16:
In the
PPP Settings
dialog box, select the
Enable LCP extensions
SMP Gateway User Manual
•
205
22.1.2
Step
4
To do this
Configure
SMP Manager to communicate with the
SMP Gateway
Follow these steps: checkbox and the
Enable software compression
checkbox. Clear the
Negotiate multi-link for single link connections checkbox.
Click
OK
.
17.
18.
Under
This connection uses the following items
, clear the
Client for Microsoft Networks checkbox.
19.
Click
Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)
, and click
Properties
.
20.
In the Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties dialog box, click
Advanced
.
21.
In the Advanced TCP/IP Settings dialog box, clear the Use default gateway on remote network
checkbox and the
Use IP header compression
checkbox and click
OK
, three times
22.
Close the
Connect <Connection Name> dialog box.
1.
Start SMP Manager . Select the SMP Gateway to be configured and from the
File
menu, click
SMP Gateway Properties
.
2.
In the Gateway Properties dialog box, type a significant name for the new SMP Gateway, such as “SMP Gateway via modem”.
3.
If you have an SMP 4-20 or an SMP 8-40:
‰ Type 100.100.100.1 in the
First IP Address
box.
‰ Type 100.100.100.2 in the Second IP Address box.
If you have an SMP 4 or an SMP 16:
‰ In the First IP Address box, type the IP pool’s starting address that you specified when you installed your SMP Gateway (see your SMP Gateway’s installation guide).
‰ Do not type anything in the
Second IP Address
box. Click
Add
.
Note that even if you set up a number of SMP Gateways to communicate via a dial-up connection, the PC will be able to communicate with only one SMP Gateway at a time, and will use the address(es) specified here.
Setting Up a Direct Serial Connection
The following table outlines the procedure for setting up a direct serial connection between a PC running Windows XP, and an SMP Gateway.
You must perform the steps in the order presented in the table.
Follow these steps: Step To do this
1 Set up the
SMP Gateway to accept a direct connection
By default, an incoming direct connection is supported on
SMP Gateway’s console port: skip to step 2 if you want to use this port; to allow an incoming direct connection on any other port, proceed as follows:
1.
In
SMP Manager
, select the SMP Gateway to be configured.
206
•
SMP Gateway User Manual
Step
2
3
To do this Follow these steps:
2.
From the
Tools
menu, click
Telnet
.
3.
Type RASMGR to start the RAS Manager application.
4.
Type “L”, to display the device list. The device list is actually the list of ports on the SMP, including the console port.
5.
Type “M”, to modify the SMP COM port you will use for the direct connection.
6.
Type the number of the “DIRECT device” to be modified.
7.
All the default settings should be OK, except for the last one:
Use
Device for Incoming Connections
. Type “Y” to allow incoming connections on the port.
8.
Press “Q” to exit RAS Manager, and then close the telnet window.
Add a communications cable between the
PC and the
SMP Gateway
Set up a new direct serial connection to the
SMP Gateway
1.
From Windows’ Start menu, access the Control Panel .
2.
Double-click
Phone and Modem Options
.
3.
In the Phone and Modem Options dialog box, click the Modems tab. Click
Add
.
4.
In the
Add Hardware Wizard
dialog box, select the
Don’t detect my modem; I will select it from a list
checkbox. Click
Next
.
5.
Under
Manufacturer
, select
Standard Modem Types
.
6.
Under
Models
, click
Communications cable between two computers
. Click
Next
.
7.
Click
Selected ports
.
8.
Click the communications port (COM1 or COM2) you want to use for the communications cable.
9.
Click
Next
, and then click
Finish
.
10.
Click
OK
to close the
Phone and Modem Options
dialog box.
11.
Connect the communications cable to both ports.
1.
From Windows’
Start
menu, access the
Control Panel
.
2.
Double-click
Network Connections
.
3.
Double-click
New Connection Wizard
.
4.
In the
New Connection Wizard
dialog box, click
Next
.
5.
Select
Set up an advanced connection
. Click
Next
.
6.
Select
Connect directly to another computer
.
Click
Next
.
7.
Select
Guest
.
Click
Next
.
8.
Type a descriptive name for the connection. Click
Next
.
9.
In the
Select a device
drop-down list, click
Communications cable between two computers
. Click
Next
.
10.
Under Create this connection for , click Anyone’s use . Click Next .
Click
Finish
.
11.
In the Connect <Connection Name> dialog box, click Properties .
12.
From the
General
tab, click
Configure
.
SMP Gateway User Manual
•
207
Step
4
To do this Follow these steps:
13.
In the
Maximum speed drop-down list, select 115200 bps.
14.
Clear the
Enable hardware flow control
checkbox. Click
OK
.
15.
Click the
Networking
tab, and then click
Settings
.
16.
In the PPP Settings dialog box, clear the Enable LCP extensions checkbox, the
Enable software compression
checkbox, and the
Negotiate multi-link for single link connections checkbox. Click
OK
.
17.
Under This connection uses the following items , clear the Client for Microsoft Networks checkbox.
18.
Click Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) , and click Properties .
19.
In the
Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties
dialog box, click
Advanced
.
20.
In the
Advanced TCP/IP Settings
dialog box, clear the
Use default gateway on remote network
checkbox and the
Use IP header compression
checkbox. Click
OK
three times.
21.
Close the
Connect <Connection Name> dialog box.
Configure
SMP Manager to communicate with the
SMP Gateway
1.
Start
SMP Manager
. Select the SMP Gateway to be configured and from the File menu, click SMP Gateway Properties .
2.
In the
Gateway Properties
dialog box, type a significant name for the new SMP Gateway, such as “SMP Gateway direct connection”.
3.
If you have an SMP 4-20 or an SMP 8-40:
‰ Type 100.100.100.1 in the
First IP Address
box.
‰ Type 100.100.100.2 in the
Second IP Address
box.
If you have an SMP 4 or an SMP 16:
‰
In the
First IP Address
box, type the IP pool starting address that you specified when you installed your SMP Gateway (see your SMP Gateway’s installation guide on the SMP Gateway
Software & Tools CD-ROM).
‰
Do not type anything in the
Second IP Address
box.
4.
Click
Add
.
The PC will communicate with the SMP Gateway using the address(es) specified here.
22.2 Windows 2000 Setup Procedures
If the SMP Tools run under Windows 2000, use the procedures outlined in this section to:
‰ Setup a dial-up (modem) connection between the PC and the SMP Gateway.
‰ Setup a direct serial connection between the PC and the SMP Gateway.
208
•
SMP Gateway User Manual
22.2.1 Setting Up a Dial-Up (Modem) Connection
The following table outlines the procedure for setting up a dial-up (modem) connection between a
PC running Windows 2000, and an SMP Gateway.
You must perform the steps in the order presented in the table.
Step To do this
1
Set up the
SMP Gateway to accept a dial-up connection
Follow these steps:
Perform this step for each SMP Gateway with which you want to communicate via modem.
1.
In
SMP Manager
, select the SMP Gateway to be configured.
2.
From the Tools menu, click Telnet .
3.
Type RASMGR to start the RAS Manager application.
4.
Type “L”, to display the device list. The device list is actually the list of ports on the SMP Gateway, including the console port.
5.
Type “M”, to modify the SMP Gateway’s COM port you will use for the dial-up connection.
6.
Type the number of the MODEM device to be modified. Note that you cannot specify the number of the console port, as the latter does not support modem connections.
7.
All the default settings should be OK, except for the last one:
Use
Device for Incoming Connections
. Type “Y” to allow incoming connections on the port.
8.
Press “Q” to exit RAS Manager, and then close the telnet window.
2 Install the modem, if necessary
1.
From Windows’
Start
menu, click
Settings
, and then click
Control
Panel
.
2.
Double-click
Phone and Modem Options
.
3.
In the
Phone and Modem Options
dialog box, click the
Modems tab.
If the modem you plan to use appears in the list, skip the rest of this step and proceed to the next item in the table, since your modem is already installed. Click
Add
.
4.
In the Add/Remove Hardware Wizard dialog box, allow Windows to detect your modem automatically, and then click
Next
.
5.
In the Found New Hardware Wizard dialog box, click Next .
6.
Choose whether you want Windows to search for a suitable driver or whether you want to choose the driver from a list. Click Next .
7.
If you have an installation CD, insert it in the drive, click
CD-ROM drives
and clear the other checkboxes; otherwise, click
Microsoft
Windows Update
and clear the other checkboxes. Click
Next
.
8.
Once Windows advises you that it has found the driver, click
Next
.
9.
Once Windows has finished installing the driver, click
Finish
.
10.
Click
Finish
to close the
Add/Remove Hardware Wizard
dialog box.
11.
Click
OK
to close the
Phone and Modem Options
dialog box.
SMP Gateway User Manual
•
209
210
•
Step To do this
3
Set up a new dial-up (modem) connection for the
SMP Gateway
Follow these steps:
Perform this step for each SMP Gateway with which you want to communicate via modem.
1.
From Windows’
Start
menu, click
Settings
, and then click
Control
Panel .
2.
Double-click
Network and Dial-up Connections
.
3.
Double-click Make New Connection .
4.
In the
Network Connection Wizard
dialog box, click
Next
.
5.
Select Dial-up to private network . Click Next .
6.
Type the phone number you will use to dial the SMP Gateway. Click
Next .
7.
Under
Create this connection
, click For all users . Click
Next
.
8.
Type a descriptive name for the connection. Click
Finish
.
9.
In the
Connect <Connection Name> dialog box, click
Properties
.
10.
In the
General
tab, click
Configure
.
11.
In the
Modem Configuration
dialog box, select the
Enable hardware flow control
checkbox, the
Enable modem error control checkbox and the
Enable modem compression
checkbox
.
12.
Click the
Networking
tab, and then click
Settings
.
13.
If you are using an SMP 4-20 or an SMP 8-40:
In the
PPP Settings
dialog box, clear the
Enable LCP extensions checkbox, the
Enable software compression
checkbox, and
Negotiate multi-link for single link connections checkbox. Click
OK
.
If you are using an SMP 4 or an SMP 16:
In the
PPP Settings
dialog box, select the
Enable LCP extensions checkbox and the Enable software compression checkbox, and clear the
Negotiate multi-link for single link connections checkbox.
Click OK .
14.
Under
Components checked are used by this connection
, clear the
Client for Microsoft Networks
checkbox and the
File and Printer
Sharing for Microsoft Networks
checkbox.
15.
Click
Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)
, and click
Properties
.
16.
In the
Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties
dialog box, click
Advanced
.
17.
In the
Advanced TCP/IP Settings
dialog box, clear the
Use default gateway on remote network
checkbox and the
Use IP header compression
checkbox. Click
OK
three times.
18.
Close the
Connect <Connection Name> dialog box.
4
Configure
SMP Manager to communicate with the
SMP Gateway
1.
In
SMP Manager
’s
File
menu, click
Add SMP Gateway
.
2.
In the
Gateway Properties
dialog box, type a significant name for the new SMP Gateway, such as “SMP Gateway via modem”.
3.
If you have an SMP 4-20 or an SMP 8-40:
SMP Gateway User Manual
22.2.2
Step To do this Follow these steps:
‰
‰
Type 100.100.100.1 in the
First IP Address
box.
Type 100.100.100.2 in the
Second IP Address
box.
If you have an SMP 4 or an SMP 16:
‰ In the
First IP Address
box, type the IP pool starting address that you specified when you installed your SMP Gateway (see your SMP Gateway’s installation guide).
‰ Do not type anything in the
Second IP Address
box. Click
Add .
Note that even if you set up a number of SMP Gateways to communicate via a dial-up connection, the PC will be able to communicate with only one SMP Gateway at a time, and will use the address(es) specified here.
Setting Up a Direct Serial Connection
The following table outlines the procedure for setting up a direct serial connection between a PC running Windows 2000, and an SMP Gateway.
You must perform the steps in the order presented in the table.
Step To do this
1
Set up the
SMP Gateway to accept a direct connection
Follow these steps:
By default, an incoming direct connection is supported on the
SMP Gateway’s console port. If you want to use a direct connection on any other port, you have to set it up as follows:
1.
In SMP Manager , select the SMP Gateway to be configured.
2.
From the
Tools
menu, click
Telnet
.
3.
Type RASMGR to start the RAS Manager application.
4.
Type “L”, to display the device list. The device list is actually the list of ports on the SMP Gateway, including the console port.
5.
Type “M”, to modify the SMP Gateway’s COM port you will use for the direct connection.
6.
Type the number of the DIRECT device to be modified.
7.
All the default settings should be OK, except for the last one:
Use
Device for Incoming Connections . Type “Y” to allow incoming connections on the port.
8.
Press “Q” to exit RAS Manager, and then close the telnet window.
2
Add a communications cable between the PC and the
SMP Gateway
1.
From the Windows
Start
menu, click
Settings
, and then click
Control Panel
.
2.
Double-click
Phone and Modem Options
.
3.
In the
Phone and Modem Options
dialog box, click the
Modems tab. Click
Add
.
4.
In the
Add/Remove Hardware Wizard
dialog box, select the
Don’t detect my modem; I will select it from a list
checkbox. Click
Next
.
SMP Gateway User Manual
•
211
212
•
Step
3
To do this Follow these steps:
5.
Under
Manufacturers
, click
Standard Modem Types
.
6.
Under
Models
, click
Communications cable between two computers
. Click
Next
.
7.
Click Selected ports .
8.
Click the communications port (COM1 or COM2) you want to use for the communications cable. Click Next . Click Finish .
9.
Click
OK
to close the
Phone and Modem Options
dialog box.
10.
Connect the communications cable to both ports.
Set up a new direct serial connection to the
SMP Gateway
1.
From Windows’
Start
menu, click
Settings
, and then click
Control
Panel
.
2.
Double-click
Network and Dial-up Connections
.
3.
Double-click
Make New Connection
.
4.
In the
Network Connection Wizard
dialog box, click
Next
.
5.
Click Connect directly to another compute r.
Click Next .
6.
Click Guest.
Click
Next
.
7.
In the Select a device drop-down list, click Communications cable between two computers
. Click
Next
.
8.
Under Create this connection , click For all users.
Click Next .
9.
Type a descriptive name for the connection. Click
Finish
.
10.
In the Connect <Connection Name> dialog box, click Properties .
11.
From the
General
tab, click
Configure
.
12.
In the
Maximum speed drop-down list, select 115,200 bps.
13.
Clear the
Enable hardware flow control
checkbox. Click
OK
.
14.
Click the
Options
tab, and select the
Redial if line is dropped checkbox.
15.
In the
Time between redial attempts
drop-down list, select 30 seconds.
16.
Click the
Networking
tab, and then click
Settings
.
17.
In the
PPP Settings
dialog box, clear the
Enable LCP extensions checkbox, the
Enable software compression
checkbox, and the
Negotiate multi-link for single link connection s checkbox. Click
OK
.
18.
Under Components checked are used by this connection , clear the
Client for Microsoft Networks checkbox and the
File and Printer
Sharing for Microsoft Networks checkbox.
19.
Click
Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)
, and click
Properties
.
20.
In the Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties dialog box, click
Advanced
.
21.
In the Advanced TCP/IP Settings dialog box, clear the Use default gateway on remote network
checkbox and the
Use IP header compression
checkbox. Click
OK
three times.
22.
Close the
Connect <Connection Name> dialog box.
SMP Gateway User Manual
Step
4
To do this Follow these steps:
Configure
SMP Manager to communicate with the
SMP Gateway
1.
From
SMP Manager
’s
File menu, click
Add SMP Gateway
.
2.
In the
Gateway Properties
dialog box, type a significant name for the new SMP Gateway, such as “SMP Gateway direct connection”.
3.
If you have an SMP 4-20 or an SMP 8-40:
‰ Type 100.100.100.1 in the
First IP Address
box.
‰ Type 100.100.100.2 in the
Second IP Address
box.
If you have an SMP 4 or an SMP 16:
‰ In the
First IP Address
box, type the IP pool starting address that you specified when you installed your SMP Gateway (see your SMP Gateway’s installation guide).
‰ Do not type anything in the
Second IP Address
box. Click
Add
.
The PC will communicate with the SMP Gateway using the address(es) specified here.
SMP Gateway User Manual
•
213
23 Using a Dial-Up Connection for DNP3 or IEC 60870-5-
101
The SMP Gateway could need a dialup connection for DNP3 or IEC 60870-5-101 protocols in a situation where there is no network between the SMP Gateway and the control center and you cannot establish a network connection to the SMP Gateway using the procedures described under
“SMP Tools Remote Access to the SMP Gateway”, page 203.
If the control center uses the DNP3 or IEC 60870-5-101 protocol, you can establish a serial connection, via a dial-up modem, between the SMP Gateway and the control center. The control center will call the SMP Gateway.
The same holds true if you need to communicate between the SMP Gateway and a device that uses
DNP3 or IEC 60870-5-101and that supports a modem connection. The SMP Gateway will call the device.
Communication via modem is available as an option on all SMP Gateway models. On the SMP 4, you use an internal modem. However, you have to order the modem at the time you purchase the
SMP Gateway, and the modem port replaces one of the serial ports. On the SMP 16/CP and
SMP 16/SG, the modem is internal and has its own port. With the SMP 4-20 and SMP 8-40, you have to use an external modem, which you plug into a serial port. Note that will all SMP Gateway models, you can always plug an external modem into any serial port.
Having the SMP Gateway communicates, via dial-up modem with a PC or a device using DNP3 or IEC 60870-5-101, requires that you perform the following configuration steps with SMP
Config
:
‰ Define which serial ports have a modem.
‰ Create a modem pool.
‰ Add modems to the pool.
‰ Create a modem pool master connection if the SMP Gateway will call a device, or create a modem pool slave connection if the control center will call the SMP Gateway.
SMP Gateway User Manual
•
215
23.1 Specifying which serial ports have modems
To indicate that a modem is connected to a specific serial port:
‰ Start SMP Config from the SMP Manager window.
‰ In the left pane, click Serial Ports .
‰ In the right pane, in the Interface drop-down list of the corresponding serial port, click
Modem Asynchronous .
23.2 Creating a modem pool
A modem pool manages a certain number of physical modems so that when an outgoing call is to be made, the pool selects an available modem to perform the call. Similarly, when an incoming call is received, the pool identifies the caller and dispatches the call to the appropriate connection
(eventually to the protocol component).
There must be at least one modem per pool. In the case of the SMP 8-40, all the modems in a pool must be connected to serial ports on the same board.
When it receives an incoming call, a modem pool needs to identify the caller in order to dispatch the call to the appropriate protocol component. Since the identification is protocol-specific, each protocol has its own method for identifying the caller. The identification procedure returns the caller’s DEVICE ADDRESS. This DEVICE ADDRESS is then compared with the DEVICE
ADDRESS of each modem pool slave connection connected to the pool. Note that a modem pool slave connection DEVICE ADDRESS is set by the protocol components. When a match is found, the communication path is set up from the modem pool slave connection to the modem.
Identification is performed by the Call Dispatcher . The identification procedure for each protocol supported is specified in the table next.
Protocol
IEC 60870-5-101
Identification Procedure
The Call Dispatcher sends an IEC 60870-5-101 RESET OF LINK broadcast frame. The slave device is expected to respond with an ACK frame containing its own DEVICE ADDRESS.
DNP3 The Call Dispatcher sends a DNP3 RESET OF LINK broadcast frame.
The slave device is expected to respond with an ACK frame containing its own DEVICE ADDRESS as the source address.
To add a modem pool:
‰ In the left pane, click Serial Ports , then on Modem Pools .
‰ In the right pane, type the name of the pool.
‰ Edit the modem pool settings.
These settings set up the behavior of the Call Dispatcher , as described in the table next.
216
•
SMP Gateway User Manual
Setting
Type
Dispatcher Address Size
Dispatcher Response
Timeout
Dispatcher Interchar Delay
Dispatcher Recover
Timeout
Dispatcher Max Request
Retry
Description
The communications protocol supported by the modem pool. The default value – automatic – means that the supported protocol will be determined automatically.
Allowed values: Automatic
IEC 60870-5-101
DNP
Default value: Automatic
The size of the DEVICE ADDRESS, in bytes. This setting is taken into account when a frame is sent or received, since it affects the size of the frame.
Range: 1 to 8
Default value: 1
This setting specifies how much time the dispatcher will wait for the reception of a response to a request.
Range: 0 to 60,000 ms
Default value: 10,000 ms
This setting specifies the maximum time allowed between 2 received bytes of a frame, for the frame to be considered valid.
Range: 0 to 10,000 ms
Default value: 250 ms
This setting specifies how much time the dispatcher will wait after a failure (invalid frame format, etc.), before retrying.
Range: 0 to 10,000 ms
Default value: 1,000 ms
This setting specifies how many times the dispatcher will try to identify the device.
Range: 0 to 20
Default value: 3
23.3 Adding a modem to a modem pool
To add a modem to a modem pool:
‰ In the left pane, click Serial Ports , then on Modems .
SMP Gateway User Manual
•
217
218
•
‰ In the right pane, choose a modem pool in the drop-down list for each modem.
This will add the modem to the modem pool.
‰ Edit the modem settings for each modem (see following table).
‰ In the left pane, click Asynchronous Serial Ports .
‰ In the right pane, edit the serial port settings for each modem.
The meaning of each modem setting is given below:
Setting
AT Init String
Description
This AT string is sent to the serial port to initialize the modem. It should be a valid AT string to which the modem will respond with an OK.
Default value: ATZ
AT Off-Hook String This AT string is sent to the modem to answer the call when a RING message is received. The modem must
, therefore, be configured to NOT auto-answer the calls (avoid S0=X, where X is other than 0).
Default value: ATA
AT Dial String
AT On-Hook String
Incoming Only
AT Response Timeout
This AT string is prefixed to the phone number and sent to the modem to make outgoing calls.
Default value: ATDT
This AT string is sent to the modem to hang up. After a call has been completed, the “AT Init String” is always sent to reinitialize the modem.
Default value: ATH0
Put a checkmark if you want the modem to receive incoming calls but not be able to make outgoing calls. If you do not put a checkmark, the modem will be able to make and receive calls.
Allowed values: checkmark / no checkmark
Default value: no checkmark
Specifies how much time the modem pool will wait for an answer to an
AT string command. There is an exception for the ATDT and ATA commands, since it can take some time to synchronize the carriers and complete the call. For these exceptions, the maximum time is set to 3 minutes.
The timeout value depends on the modem and more specifically, on the response time required for the +++ and ATH commands.
Range: 0 to 60,000 ms
Default value: 5,000 ms
SMP Gateway User Manual
23.4 Adding a modem pool master connection
A modem pool master connection is used by a protocol component to make outgoing calls to a device. This connection makes the link between the protocol component and the modem pool.
To add a modem pool master connection, proceed as follows:
‰ In the left pane, click Connections , then on Modem Masters .
‰ In the right pane:
‰ Type the name of the connection.
‰ Specify, via the drop-down list, the modem pool with which the connection will be associated. The modems belonging to the specified modem pool will be used to make outgoing calls for this connection.
‰ Type the phone number and a supplementary AT initialization string. The phone number is mandatory and can contain any characters recognized by the modem. See your modem documentation about the availability and meaning of each dialing option. This setting cannot contain the ATDT prefix, since the latter is already configured in the modem settings. The supplementary AT initialization string is an optional AT string that will be sent to the modem just before the calling ATDTxxx command. This setting can be used to fine-tune modem options for specific calls, which means that you can override options specified in the general modem initialization string.
23.5 Adding a modem pool slave connection
A modem pool slave connection is used by a protocol component to receive incoming calls from a control center. This connection makes the link between the protocol component and the modem pool.
To add a modem pool slave connection:
‰ In the left pane, click Connections , then on Modem Slaves .
‰ In the right pane:
‰ Type the name of the connection.
‰ Specify, via the drop-down list, the modem pool with which the connection will be associated. Calls received by this modem pool will be dispatched to this connection component if the DEVICE ADDRESS matches.
SMP Gateway User Manual
•
219
24 Updating SMP Gateway’s
Software and Tools
This chapter explains the software architecture of the SMP Gateway and describes how to update the SMP Tools and the SMP Gateway’s software.
24.1 Software Architecture of the SMP Gateway
To configure the SMP Gateway, you use the SMP Tools, software that runs on your computer under Windows Vista, XP or 2000. Inside the SMP Gateway, there are also software components that need upgrading:
‰ The SMP Gateway runs on Windows CE, called a firmware, the equivalent of Windows XP on your computer. Other firmware that runs on the SMP Gateway includes the bootstrap programs and the SMP Gateway application.
‰ The SMP Gateway application (.app file), which contains your protocol translators and other gateway software files.
‰ The configuration file (.par file), which tells the gateway how to communicate with the computer.
One of the SMP Tools is specialized in carrying files from the computer to the gateway:
SMP Loader. This tool is mainly used for SMP 4-20 and SMP 8-40 models, and is described in the
section “SMP Loader”, page 234).
Consequently, whenever you receive a CD-ROM from Cooper Power Systems (or the contents of the CD-ROM via FTP access to a download site), you should perform an update of all this pieces of software. Follow these steps, in the order they are presented :
‰ Update the PC software, i.e., the
SMP Tools
(see “Updating the SMP Tools on the PC”, page
‰ For each SMP Gateway:
‰
Update the SMP Gateway firmware (see “Updating the SMP Gateway Firmware”, page
222, and “SMP Loader”, page 234).
SMP Gateway User Manual
•
221
‰
Update the SMP Gateway application (see “Updating the SMP Gateway Application”, page 224).
‰
Update the SMP Gateway’s configuration file (see “Updating the Configuration File”, page 225).
The table below shows the exact order in which you will update the SMP Gateway components, and the SMP Tool that you will use to perform the update.
Component to update
Bootstrap programs
SMP 4 or SMP 16 Tool
SMP Loader
SMP 4-20/SMP 8-40 Tool
SMP Loader
Resident diagnostics SMP Manager SMP Loader
Windows CE
SMP Gateway application
Configuration file
SMP Manager
SMP Manager
SMP Config and SMP Manager
SMP Loader
SMP Manager
SMP Config and SMP Manager
24.2 Updating the SMP Tools on the PC
Whenever you receive a new version from Cooper Power Systems, with a new version or release of the SMP software and tools, you will start by updating the SMP Tools on your PC. Much more rarely, you may need to update JRE (Java 2 Runtime Environment).
Proceed as follows:
‰ Insert the SMP Software and Tools CD-ROM in your computer’s CD drive.
‰ In the Welcome to the SMP Gateway window, click Upgrading.
‰ There may be specific instructions that apply to the version you were using previously. If so, follow these instructions before performing the upgrade.
‰ Click the item you want to upgrade and follow the instructions.
The SMP Tools installer will automatically remove the previous version before installing the new one.
24.3 Updating the SMP Gateway Software
24.3.1 Updating the SMP Gateway Firmware
The functions of the SMP Gateway are provided by a sophisticated embedded software system that includes a number of components:
222
•
SMP Gateway User Manual
24.3.1.1
‰ The bootstrap program.
That program loads the SMP Gateway application and the Windows
CE operating system into memory when the SMP Gateway starts up. This program rarely changes.
‰ The Windows CE operating system , which provides real-time system services, network services, and device drivers.
‰ The resident diagnostics , which allow you to ensure that the SMP Gateway is working properly.
‰ The SMP Gateway application , which implements all the functionalities of the
SMP Gateway.
The SMP Gateway firmware update process differs, whether the gateway is an SMP 16/SMP 4 or an SMP 4-20/SMP 8-40.
SMP 16 or SMP 4
To update the firmware, execute the following steps in the order presented here :
If need be , update the secondary bootstrap program, with the SMP Loader tool.
Note: The bootstrap programs’ version numbers can be found on the SMP Gateway
Software & Tools CD-ROM, in the page entitled What's New . If one of the bootstrap program version number you read from your SMP Gateway's
SMP Stats (for more information, refer to page 55) is older, then you must go on
to the bootstrap program file update instructions (see “SMP Loader”, page 234).
‰ Remove the cable that you connected between the SMP Gateway console port and the PC when you used SMP Loader .
‰ Start
SMP Manager
, and monitor the progress of the reset operation.
Update the resident diagnostics:
‰ In the SMP Manager window, click your SMP Gateway.
‰ From the Update menu, click Update SMP Gateway Firmware . The Select Firmware
Library
dialog box appears.
‰ In the SMP 16 or SMP 4 folder, under SMP Tools\Manager\SMP Firmware
Libraries , choose the diagnostics file. The file is called diagsSMP16.pkg
or diagsSMP4.pkg
.
‰ SMP Manager
transfers the file to your SMP Gateway and then informs you that you have to restart your SMP Gateway for the new firmware to go into effect. Simply close the Restart Gateway dialog box; if you are updating other components, you do not need to restart the SMP Gateway now.
Update Windows CE:
‰ Proceed as for the resident diagnostics, but in the firmware libraries, choose the Windows
CE file. The file is called wince x .pkg
, where x is the version number. SMP Manager
SMP Gateway User Manual
•
223
24.3.1.2
transfers the file to your SMP Gateway and then informs you that you have to restart your
SMP Gateway for the new firmware to go into effect.
‰ In the Restart Gateway dialog box, choose Shutdown and Restart to have the
SMP Gateway restart in normal mode.
‰ All restarts are automatically logged in SMP Gateway’s
Reset
log file. If you want to, you can type a comment in order to indicate why you restarted the SMP Gateway. This comment will be added to the log entry.
The SMP Gateway will go through a series of startup steps, which will be displayed in the
Status
column in SMP Manager. Once the startup is complete, the
Status
column will display the current status of the SMP Gateway.
The Status column should display Started . If the Status column shows that your SMP Gateway
did not start up normally, refer to “Troubleshooting”, page 247.
SMP 4-20 or SMP 8-40
To update the firmware of these SMP Gateway models, you will use SMP Loader . You will find
detailed instructions on under “SMP Loader”, page 234.
Execute the steps in the order presented here :
‰ Update the primary and secondary bootstrap programs.
‰ Update the resident diagnostics.
‰ Update Windows CE.
‰ Remove the cable that you connected between the SMP Gateway console port and your PC when you used SMP Loader .
‰ Reset the SMP Gateway by holding down the reset button for at least 5 seconds, until the 4 front panel LEDs turn amber.
‰ Start SMP Manager.
The SMP Gateway will go through a series of startup steps, which will be displayed in the Status column. Once the startup is complete, the Status column should display Started . If the Status
column shows that your SMP Gateway did not start up normally, refer to “Troubleshooting”, page
24.3.2 Updating the SMP Gateway Application
You will now update the SMP Gateway application.
Proceed as follows:
‰ In the SMP Manager window, click your SMP Gateway.
‰ From the Update menu, click Update SMP Gateway Application.
The Select Library dialog box appears.
224
•
SMP Gateway User Manual
24.3.3
‰ Under Program Files\Cybectec\SMP Tools\Manager\SMP Software Libraries, select folder
SMP 16, SMP 4, SMP 4-20 or SMP 8-40, depending on your SMP Gateway model.
‰ Choose the SMP Gateway application version that you want to send to the SMP Gateway.
The file has the extension “ .app
” and its name indicates the application version. For example, a file called SmpApp 1.14R2.app
contains version 1.14, release 2, of the SMP Gateway application.
SMP Manager sends the software to the specified SMP Gateway, and then informs you that you have to restart your SMP Gateway for the new application to go into effect.
‰ Simply close the Restart Gateway dialog box, without restarting the SMP Gateway.
Updating the Configuration File
The last step in upgrading to a new version of the SMP Gateway’s software and tools consists of updating the configuration file:
‰ Start SMP Config and open your configuration file.
‰ The file name in the title bar should have a star (*) beside to inform you there is a change.
‰ From the File menu, click Save .
‰ A message box will inform you that the current configuration file will be upgraded to a current version. A backup is automatically saved with the word “backup” before the previous file’s name.
‰ Send the configuration file to the SMP Gateway using SMP Manager:
‰ From the Update menu, select Send configuration file .
‰ SMP Manager will transfer the file on the SMP Gateway
SMP Gateway User Manual
•
225
25 Activating a New License
Whenever you contact Cooper Power Systems to request support for a new device that you want to connect to your SMP Gateway, or to add support for a particular option for your SMP Gateway,
Cooper Power Systems will provide you with a new license.
To activate your new license and take advantage of the new components, you need to go through the following steps:
‰
Update your license information (see “Updating your License Information”, below).
‰
Update the SMP Gateway’s application (see “Updating the SMP Gateway Application”, page
25.1 Updating your License Information
Proceed as follows to update your license information:
‰ In the
SMP Manager
window, click your SMP Gateway.
‰ From the Update menu, click Update SMP Gateway License.
The Update License dialog box appears.
226
•
‰ Type your License ID and Key (both rows) exactly as they appear on the SMP Gateway’s
Software & Tools CD-ROM cover or in a email that may have been sent to you about this matter. Click OK .
SMP Gateway User Manual
‰ If you are updating the license information for a group of SMP 4-20s or SMP 8-40s that have the same license ID, you can simplify the task as follows:
‰ Type the license ID and key (both rows) of the first SMP Gateway. The license ID you have just typed gets added to the License ID drop-down list, and SMP Manager keeps track of the associated key. For the remaining SMP Gateways, simply choose the license
ID in the drop-down list; the key information will be supplied automatically.
‰ Another way to simplify the task is to select several SMP Gateways of the same type before performing the update. The license information will be applied to all the selected
SMP Gateways.
‰ You can click the Details button, in order to view the functions provided by the new license before actually performing the update.
‰ If SMP Manager suggests that you restart the SMP Gateway, restart it in normal mode by choosing
Shutdown and Restart
in the
Restart Gateway
dialog box. If a new protocol has
The License Information dialog box appears when you click Details in the Update License dialog box, or when you click License Information from SMP Manager’s Gateway menu. It displays the various software features supported by your license, such as redundancy, Soft PLC and automation functions. It also displays information about the number of master protocols (one per device) and slave protocols (one per control center) supported by your license. For all models except the SMP 4, the dialog box also shows which specific protocols are supported by your license.
The dialog box is shown below, first for an SMP 8-40 and then, for an SMP 4.
SMP Gateway User Manual
•
227
Here is a brief explanation of the classes shown in the dialog box:
‰ Class 1 includes commonly used protocols such as DNP3, Modicon MODBUS, SEL and
IEC60870-5.
‰ Class 2 currently includes only UCA 2.0.
‰ Class 3 currently includes ICCP and 61850.
228
•
SMP Gateway User Manual
26 Miscellaneous SMP Tool
Features
This section presents SMP Manager and SMP Config commands that provide useful capabilities, and that were not discussed in other sections of the document.
26.1 SMP Manager Features
SMP Manager has a number of handy features:
‰ Displaying only those SMP Gateways with which SMP Manager is currently in communication.
(Click
Active Gateways
from the
View menu.)
‰ Choosing the time display format: local time or UTC.
(Click Options from the Tools
menu. See also “Modifying SMP Manager’s Settings”,
below.)
‰ Exporting your SMP Gateway list.
(Click Export List from the File menu.)
‰ Importing an SMP Gateway list.
(Click Import list from the File menu.)
‰ Setting the behavior of
SMP Manager
.
Some SMP Manager settings can also be customized to your needs, as described in the following section
26.1.1 Modifying SMP Manager’s Settings
To modify SMP Manager’s settings:
‰ From the Tools menu, click Options . The Options dialog box will appear.
SMP Gateway User Manual
•
229
‰ Select the format you want to use to display time information in SMP Manager:
‰ Local Time .
Time information obtained from SMP Gateways will be adjusted to your PC’s time zone and daylight saving time information.
‰ UTC .
Time information obtained from SMP Gateways will be displayed as is.
‰ Under Cybectec Enterprise Solutions , you will find settings that are specific to global security, which is not covered by this manual. Refer to Cybectec Enterprise Solutions for more information about this settings and global security.
‰ Under Paths , you can change the name and the location of the file containing the list of
SMP Gateways that are currently displayed in SMP Manager. This file has a .vep
extension.
26.2 SMP Config Features
SMP Config has a few handy features:
‰ Exporting your SMP Gateway’s configuration to a .csv file.
(Click
Export from the
File menu.)
‰ Importing an SMP Gateway configuration previously saved as a .csv file.
(Click Import from the File menu.)
‰ Clearing the message pane.
(Click
Clear Message Pane
from the
Validate
menu.)
230
•
SMP Gateway User Manual
26.3 System Data Points
The SMP Gateway has system points for various purposes and features, such as remote access, security, time adjustment and redundancy. When they are present on an SMP Gateway, they can be seen using the SMP Gateway’s Web Server. When an SMP Gateway’s slave protocol subscribes to them, they provide useful information to the SCADA.
The following list describes all available system data points:
Data Point Name Description
Power Status
_smp___voltage_ok
_smp___temp_ok
(available on SMP 4-20 and
SMP 8-40)
If set to 1, this binary input point indicates that the
SMP Gateway’s power supply’s voltage is within its normal range of operation.
Temperature
If set to 1, this binary input point indicates that the
SMP Gateway’s internal temperature is within an acceptable range.
_smp___temperature
(available on SMP 16/SP)
_smp___clockYear
_smp___clockMonth
_smp___clockDay
_smp___clockHour
_smp___clockMinute
_smp___clockSecond
This analog input point states the temperature, in °C, inside the gateway.
Clock-Related Information
This analog input point states the SMP Gateway internal clock’s year information.
This analog input point states the SMP Gateway internal clock’s month information.
This analog input point states the SMP Gateway internal clock’s day information.
This analog input point states the SMP Gateway internal clock’s hour information, using the 24-hour notation.
This analog input point states the SMP Gateway internal clock’s minute information.
This analog input point states the SMP Gateway internal clock’s second information.
_smp___clockSynchronized
(available on SMP 4 and SMP 16)
If set to 1, this binary input point indicates that the
SMP Gateway’s internal clock is actually synchronized with an external time source, such as GPS or IRIG-B.
_smp___battery_ok
(available on SMP 4-20, SMP 8-40 and SMP 4)
If set to 1, this binary input point indicates that the clock’s battery is operational..
SMP Gateway User Manual
•
231
232
•
Data Point Name Description
Local Control
_smp___setLocalControl
_smp___localControl
_smp___restartSystem
_smp___setNOrelay
(available on SMP 16)
_smp___stateNOrelay
(available on SMP 16)
_smp___securityAccountLocked
This binary output point allows you to switch from local control (by a local HMI, such as Visual Substation), to remote control (by the SCADA).
_smp___localControl indicates the current control state of the SMP Gateway.
If set to 1, this binary input point indicates that the
SMP Gateway is actually controlled locally, by Visual
Substation or another HMI. If the gateway is currently controlled by the SCADA, this point is set to 0. At the
SMP Gateway’s startup, this point is set to 0.
This binary output point allows you to restart the
SMP Gateway.
This binary output point allows you to open and close the
SMP Gateway’s normally open (NO) relay.
_smp___stateNOrelay
indicates the actual state of the relay.
This binary input point indicates the actual state of the
SMP Gateway’s normally open (NO) relay. If set to 1, the relay is closed.
Security
This binary input point shows if there is an account locked on the SMP Gateway.
Remote Access
_smp___dialupEnable
_smp___dialupEnabled
This binary output point allows you to accept or block all incoming RAS dialup connections to the SMP Gateway. Set it to 1 to accept all incoming RAS dialup connections.
_smp__dialupEnabled
indicates the resulting state.
This binary input point indicates if all incoming RAS dialup connections to the SMP Gateway are accepted of blocked. If set to 1, all connections are accepted.
_smp___dialupInUse This binary input point indicates whether or not there is actually communication in progress via an incoming RAS dialup connection.
Passthrough
(for each passthrough connection named “ <connection> ”)
_smp___< connection >Enable
_smp___< connection >Enabled
This binary output point allows you to lock or unlock the passthrough connection. Set it to 0 to lock the connection.
_smp___< connection
>Enabled indicates if the connection is locked or not.
This binary input point indicates the passthrough connection’s lock state. If set to 0, the connection is locked and cannot be used.
SMP Gateway User Manual
Data Point Name
_smp___< connection >InUse
Description
If set to 1, this binary input point indicates that the passthrough connection is currently active.
System Folders
(for each system folder named < folder name >)
_smp___Folder< id >< folder name >
_Available
If set to 1, this binary input point indicates that the system folder is available to the SMP Gateway.
_smp___Folder< id >< folder name >
_FreeDiskSpace
_smp___Folder< id >< folder name >
_LowDiskSpace
_smp___rsLocal_ok
_smp___rsRemote_ok
_smp___rsLocal_active
_smp___rsRemote_standby
_smp___rsRemote_hotStandby
_smp___rsFirstConnection_ok
_smp___rsSecondConnection_ok
_smp___rsSynchronized
This analog input point states the amount of disk space that is available on the system folder’s host.
If set to 1, this binary input point indicates that the system folder’s host is running low on disk space.
Redundancy
If set to 1, this binary input point indicates that the
SMP Gateway is currently operational.
This point is mirrored in the
_smp___rsRemote_ok
binary input point of the other SMP Gateway of the group.
If set to 1, this binary input point indicates that the other
SMP Gateway of the group is currently operational.
This point is mirrored in the _smp___rsLocal_ok binary input point of the other SMP Gateway.
If set to 1, this binary input point indicates that the
SMP Gateway is active.
If set to 0, it indicates that the SMP Gateway is on standby.
If set to 1, this binary input point indicates that the other
SMP Gateway of the group is on standby.
If set to 0, it indicates that the other SMP Gateway of the group is active.
If set to 1, this binary input point indicates that the other
SMP Gateway of the group is on hot standby.
For more information about Hot Standby, see section 19.4, page 191.
If set to 1, this binary input point indicates that the first link between the redundant SMP Gateways is operational.
If set to 1, this binary input point indicates that the second link between the redundant SMP Gateways is operational.
If set to 1, this binary input point indicates that the internal clocks of the redundant SMP Gateways are automatically adjusted using the same time source. This point’s state can be
SMP Gateway User Manual
•
233
Data Point Name Description used as a failover condition.
_smp___rsLan_ok
_smp___rsVoltage_ok
_smp___rsTemp_ok
If set to 1, this binary input point indicates that the
SMP Gateway’s access to the LAN is operational. This point’s state can be used as a failover condition.
If set to 1, this binary input point indicates that the
SMP Gateway’s power supply’s voltage is within its normal range of operation. This point’s state can be used as a failover condition.
If set to 1, this binary input point indicates that the
SMP Gateway’s internal temperature is within an acceptable range. This point’s state can be used as a failover condition.
_smp___rsMem_ok
_smp___rsGroupAddress_ok
_smp___plcProgramRunning
If set to 0, this binary input point indicates that the
SMP Gateway is running low on memory. This point’s state can be used as a failover condition.
If set to 0, this binary input point indicates that the public IP address defined for the group conflicts with another device that uses the same address. This point’s state can be used as a failover condition.
Soft PLC
If set to 1, the binary input point indicates that a Soft PLC automation script is currently running on the SMP Gateway.
Annunciator
_annunciator___alarmActiveCount This analog input point states the number of active alarms.
_annunciator___alarmBlocked
Count
This analog input point states the number of blocked alarms.
_annunciator___alarmConfigCount This analog input point states the number of data points configured to trigger alarms.
_annunciator___alarmToAckCount This analog input point states the number of alarms that require acknowledgment.
_annunciator___alarmToClear
Count
_annunciator___generalAlarm
This analog input point states the number of alarms that have been acknowledge and that may be cleared.
If set to 1, this binary input point indicates that at least one alarm is currently active.
26.4 SMP Loader
SMP Loader should be used for the following purposes:
234
•
SMP Gateway User Manual
26.4.1
26.4.1.1
‰ To update Windows CE, the resident diagnostics, the primary bootstrap program, or the secondary bootstrap program of an SMP 4-20 or an SMP 8-40.
‰ You can, in fact, load Windows CE and the resident diagnostics with SMP Loader , but you should use SMP Manager unless there is a problem.
When the SMP Gateway is powered up or reset, the following components are started up, in the order listed:
‰ The primary bootstrap program.
‰ The secondary bootstrap program.
‰ Windows CE.
In order to use SMP Loader , you need to interrupt the startup process before it reaches Windows
CE’s startup. You accomplish this by putting the SMP Gateway into Command mode.
Setting Up SMP Loader
Setting up SMP Loader requires that you go through 3 steps:
‰ Connect your PC to the SMP Gateway’s console port.
‰ Start SMP Loader.
‰ Put the SMP Gateway into Command mode.
Connecting your PC to the SMP Gateway
Proceed as follows:
‰ Connect one of the communications ports of your PC to the SMP Gateway’s console port, using a standard RS-232 direct cable equipped with a DB9 male connector at one end and a
DB9 female connector at the other end.
Note: If you are using a portable computer that does not have an external serial port, you will need to use an USB-to-RS-232 serial converter.
26.4.1.2 Starting SMP Loader
Once your PC is connected to the SMP Gateway, start SMP Loader as follows:
‰ Click Start on the Windows taskbar.
‰ Point to All Programs , then to Cybectec , and then to SMP Tools .
‰ From the
SMP Tools
menu, click
SMP Loader
.
SMP Gateway User Manual
•
235
26.4.1.3
The
SMP Loader
main window appears.
‰ From the Connection menu, click Communication Settings to display the Communication
Settings dialog box.
Most of the communication settings are unavailable, as they cannot be changed.
‰ Select the communications port that will be used on your PC (ex. COM1).
‰ Specify 115,200 bps as the file transfer speed. If your computer does not support the specified speed, try a lower value for this setting.
‰ Click OK .
Do not close SMP Loader: it will connect to the SMP Gateway automatically when the latter will enter Command mode.
Putting the SMP Gateway into Command Mode
To put the SMP Gateway into Command mode, you simply need to reset the SMP Gateway.
Proceed as follows, depending on the SMP Gateway model:
‰ SMP 4-20 or SMP 8-40 :
Hold down the reset button until all the LEDs (power, watchdog timer, ST1 and ST2) simultaneously turn amber.
‰ SMP 4 :
Insert a pointed object in the reset aperture and apply pressure until the watchdog timer LED stops flashing. Do not use a lead pencil , since lead is a conductor, as it could break and damage the SMP 4.
‰ SMP 16 :
Power off the SMP 16, and then power it up again.
Within approximately 30 seconds, the SMP Loader window will show the files that are currently loaded on the SMP Gateway.
26.4.2 Main Window
The SMP Loader’s main window is shown next, first for an SMP 16/SG, and then for an SMP 8-
40.
236
•
SMP Gateway User Manual
As you can see, the SMP 16 display only shows Windows CE (in the example, version 4 is loaded on the SMP 16). The same applies to an SMP 4. The SMP 8-40 screen shows Windows CE and the resident diagnostics, and each file name is preceded by the board – A or B – on which the file is located. The Created and Received columns will show “N/A” if the date and time are not available due to certain hardware constraints.
It is important to note that the display area does not list the bootstrap programs, even though these do indeed reside on the SMP. However, the secondary bootstrap version is shown at the bottom right of the window, on the status bar. In very rare cases, the status bar could show a primary
bootstrap for an SMP 4-20 or SMP 8-40 (see “Corrupted secondary bootstrap”, page 240).
You can also view the bootstrap programs’ version numbers as follows:
‰ From the Connection menu, click Bootstrap Versions.
A dialog box appears, showing the versions of both bootstrap programs.
Note: For the SMP 4 and SMP 16, the dialog box indicates that the primary bootstrap version is unavailable since it resides in the ROM and cannot be modified in the field.
26.4.3 Transferring Files to the SMP Gateway
You can transfer one or more files to the SMP Gateway, and you can choose the files individually.
To choose the files to transfer, do one of the following:
SMP Gateway User Manual
•
237
‰ Using Windows Explorer, drag and drop the files in your SMP Loader main screen display.
OR
‰ Click Send from the File menu. The Send one of more files dialog box appears.
‰ Point to SMP Tools\Manager\SMP Firmware Libraries , and then to the SMP 4 , SMP 4-
20, SMP 8-40 or SMP 16 folder, depending on the model of SMP Gateway.
‰ Choose SMP Loader Files (*.vl) in the Files of type drop-down list. This will display one or more files with the .VL extension. Select the file you want to send, and click Open .
The File Information dialog box appears, giving you a description of each file, within the .VL file, that you are about to transfer and asking you to confirm your intention to carry out the transfer.
238
•
The transfer takes place once you have responded to the question for all the files that were listed in the .VL file, and a dialog box shows you the progress of the operation.
After the transfer, the files appear in the list of the SMP Loader’s main window, if they were not already in the list. Otherwise, you will simply notice a difference in the version number, the size and the creation date. In our example, we updated the diagnostics file from version 1.1R11 to
version 1.1R12 (compare with the corresponding figure of the “Main Window” section, page 236).
SMP Gateway User Manual
26.4.4
Notes:
‰ The SMP Gateway will not use the transferred files until next reset.
‰ If you transferred a bootstrap program, it will not appear in the list even though the file has indeed been transferred. Furthermore, if you look at the bootstrap version numbers
(by clicking Bootstrap Versions in the Connection menu), you will see that the secondary bootstrap number has not been updated. The version number will be updated on next reset of the SMP Gateway.
Log File
SMP Loader records every significant event until you exit the application, including startup, file transfers, file deletions, requests for bootstrap programs version numbers, communications port settings, transfer cancellations, refreshes, communication errors, and so on.
The log file, which can be read using Notepad, is located in
SMP Tools\Manager\SMP
Firmware Libraries , under the name Loader.log
.
Note: Each time you start the application, SMP Loader overwrites the information contained in the file.
26.4.5
26.4.5.1
Updating Bootstraps Under Unusual Circumstances
Unexpected events, such as a blackout during a bootstrap program file’s transfer, could cause a bootstrap program to become corrupted. For an SMP 4-20 or SMP 8-40, this can happen to the primary or the secondary bootstrap; for an SMP 4 or SMP 16, it can only happen to the secondary bootstrap.
Corrupted Primary Bootstrap
If the primary bootstrap program of an SMP 4-20 or SMP 8-40 is corrupted, contact Cybectec
Technical Support.
SMP Gateway User Manual
•
239
26.4.5.2 Corrupted secondary bootstrap
If the secondary bootstrap of your SMP Gateway is corrupted, use one of the following procedures.
SMP 4 or SMP 16
‰ Contact Cybectec Technical Support.
SMP 4-20 or SMP 8-40
Normally, SMP Loader communicates with the secondary bootstrap program of the
SMP Gateway. However, if the secondary bootstrap is corrupted, SMP Loader has to communicate with the primary bootstrap in order to load a new secondary bootstrap.
In that case, you have to put the primary bootstrap in Update mode. In this mode, you do not have access to the usual SMP Loader functions. All you can do is load the bootstrap programs.
Also note that SMP Loader will automatically set its communications speed to 19,200 bps.
Proceed as follows:
‰ Simultaneously hold down the reset, TEST1 and TEST2 buttons until all four LEDs
(power, watchdog timer, ST1 and ST2) turn amber.
‰ Release ONLY the reset button and keep holding down the TEST1 and TEST2 buttons until the first 2 LEDs (power and watchdog timer) go from amber to red, and the other 2 (ST1 and
ST2) go from amber to green.
Note: At this point, the information displayed on the LCD is not valid and is, therefore, to be ignored.
‰ Transfer the secondary bootstrap program to the SMP using SMP Loader
Files to the SMP Gateway”, 237).
240
•
SMP Gateway User Manual
27 Telnet-Based Functions
Telnet access to the SMP Gateway provides you with a command line prompt for running tools and low-level commands on the SMP Gateway. Telnet tools are gradually being replaced by
Windows-based tools. If you feel more at ease with the command line interface, you can use the following commands:
‰ FirewallMgr (Firewall Manager)
‰ Time and Date.
‰ TCP/IP address and RAS setup, as described in each device's installation manual.
‰
SnmpMgr (SNMP Manager), as described in section 20.2, page 193.
‰ ClockMgr (Clock Manager).
27.1 Starting a Telnet Session
All the aforementioned commands can be called on a Telnet session’s command line. To start a
Telnet session, proceed as follows:
‰ If the SMP Gateway’s firewall is active, pre-establish the VPN connection, by following the
procedure described in the “Manually Setting Up a VPN Connection” section, page 103.
‰ Click your SMP Gateway in the
SMP Manager’s
application window; from the
Tools
menu, click Telnet to start a Telnet session.
‰ In the Telnet window, type the username and password of a user account that has the System
Management privilege.
You can now execute any of the Telnet commands that are described in the following sections.
27.2 Firewall Manager
Since version 4 of the SMP Gateway Software & Tools, the firewall is configured using SMP
Config. Firewall Manager can now only be used to view the firewall’s current status and custom rules.
SMP Gateway User Manual
•
241
27.2.1
27.2.2
27.2.3
If you have setup a firewall using a previous version of the SMP Gateway software, you can still use Firewall Manager to set up rules. However, these rules will be overridden if you set up a
firewall instance using SMP Config (see “Configuring the Firewall”, page 104).
Note: To use Firewall Manager, the user must have the System Management privilege for the SMP Gateway.
To use Firewall Manager, proceed as follows:
‰ In the Telnet window, type the following command at the prompt: firewallmgr
Firewall Manager
displays the list of available commands, as the following shows:
Firewall Manager.
Available commands (case insensitive):
Note: Use "SMP Config" to change the firewall configuration.
R Show custom firewall rules.
S Show the current firewall and VPN status.
H Display the list of available commands.
Q Quit.
The commands are described in the following sections.
R Command
The R command displays the list of firewall rules you have set-up.
S Command
The S command shows the current status of the firewall and VPN connections.
Example:
Firewall: disable
Firewall log: enable
VPN connections: 2
H Command
The H command displays the list of available commands, as shown at the beginning of this section.
242
•
SMP Gateway User Manual
27.2.4 Q Command
The Q command is used to exit the firewall manager.
27.3 Time and Date
You can now set the SMP Gateway’s date and time using SMP Manager, as described in the
“Setting SMP Gateway’s Internal Clock” section, page 195.But the
Time and Date Telnet commands are still available for that matter.To set the SMP Gateway’s time:
‰ In the Telnet window, type the following command at the prompt: time
The current UTC time is displayed, followed by a prompt for the new time. For example:
The current time is: 3:22:40 PM
Enter the new time (hh:mm:ss):
‰ Type the new UTC time in the requested format and press ENTER.
To set the SMP Gateway’s date:
‰ In the Telnet window, type the following command at the prompt: date
The current time is displayed, followed by a prompt for the new time. For example:
The current date is: Tuesday, June 10, 2008
Enter the new date (mm-dd-[yy]yy):
‰ Type the new date in the requested format (year can be specified using two digits) and press
ENTER.
Note: For both commands, the time/data will remain unchanged if you do not type anything and press ENTER.
27.4 Clock Manager
Clock Manager was used for time adjustment setup. It has been replaced by SMP Config since version 4 of the SMP Gateway Software & Tools. It is now mainly used to get an overview of the
GPS clock settings; for more details, refer to the SMP 16 GPS clock option installation manual.
SMP Gateway User Manual
•
243
27.4.1
27.4.2
27.4.3
To use Clock Manager, proceed as follows:
‰ In the Telnet window, type the following command at the prompt: clockmgr
Clock Manager
displays the list of available commands, as the following shows:
Clock Manager.
Available commands (case insensitive):
Note: Use "SMP Config" to change the clock configuration.
D Display the current settings.
H Display the list of available commands.
Q Quit.
The commands are described in the following sections.
D Command
The D command shows the current settings of the optional GPS clock.
Example:
GPS Cable length: 0 m
IRIG-B distribution format for the GPS: IRIG-BXX0 IEEE 1344
Always distribute the IRIG-B signal: No
H Command
The H command displays the list of available commands, as shown at the beginning of this section.
Q Command
The Q command is used to exit the clock manager.
27.5 Elo Touchscreen Driver Manager
If you use a touch screen with your SMP Gateway, you may no longer be able to reset the calibration settings via the touch screen itself. At runtime, you can use the Elo Touchscreen Driver
Manager for this matter.
To enter touch screen calibration mode, proceed as follows:
244
•
SMP Gateway User Manual
‰ In the Telnet window, type the following command at the prompt: elomgr.exe /c
To learn how to recalibrate the touch screen, see “Calibrating the Touch Screen”, page 151.
SMP Gateway User Manual
•
245
28 Troubleshooting
28.1.1
The SMP Gateway is a highly reliable substation-grade device. Most operational problems result from configuration errors, and there are a few simple steps you can take to identify and solve these problems.
This section discusses the following types of problems:
‰ Startup problems.
‰ Communications problems.
‰ Problems with data validity.
‰ Problems executing control operations.
‰ Firewall-related problems.
Getting Additional Help
There are a number information sources that can help you solve your problems. You can turn to our website - www.cybectec.com
, to find answers to frequently asked questions (FAQ).
Also, if your problem seems to be related to a protocol instance, you can refer to the Cooper
Power Systems documentation for the particular protocol. To access the document, proceed as follows:
‰ Click Start on Windows’ taskbar.
‰ Point to All Programs, then Cybectec, then SMP Tools, and then Documentation.
‰ From the Documentation menu, click Protocols .
The list of available documents is displayed in a Windows Explorer window.
‰ Click the document you want to read.
‰ From the File menu of the Explorer window, click Open with Adobe Reader (or Adobe
Acrobat Reader , depending on the version installed).
Your Adobe Reader program starts up and displays the document in a window.
SMP Gateway User Manual
•
247
28.1.2 Creating an SMP Gateway Report File
In the upcoming sections, we will take you through the steps required to solve your problems.
If after going through all the required procedures, you find that you need to contact Cooper Power
Systems’ Cybectec Technical Support, you will need to create a report file. This file will help the technical support team in identifying and solving the problem.
SMP Gateway report files are stored in SMP Manager ’s Reports folder. Each time a report is generated, SMP Manager creates an event log file, indicating all operations performed during the report generation. The event log file is also stored in the Reports folder.
To create an SMP Gateway report file:
‰ Select the SMP Gateway in SMP Manage r’s main window.
‰ From the Gateway menu, click Make Report .
Note: The Make Report command is available if the SMP Gateway is online.
The Gateway Report dialog box appears.
248
•
‰ Click the
Tell me more
button to display the information that will be collected from the
SMP Gateway;
‰ Type additional information in the text box, such as the problem description, or the reason why you are requesting technical support.
‰ Assign a name to the report, in the Report Name box. SMP Manager will automatically append the date and time to the report name.
‰ Select the Extract Automatically checkbox, if you want to see where the report is located as soon as SMP Manager has finished retrieving the report information. The information will be displayed in a Windows Explorer window.
‰ Click OK. The Save the gateway report file as dialog box appears.
‰ Select the folder where you want to save the report file. You can also change the file name here.
SMP Gateway User Manual
28.1.3
‰ Click
Save to start the report generation.
‰ The Gateway Report progress dialog box appears, showing each operation performed and when the report generation is complete, the dialog box indicates the completion status of the operation.
‰ Click the dialog box’s
Details
button to display the event log for the report generation.
‰ Click the Close button to close the dialog box.
If you selected the Extract Automatically checkbox, a Windows Explorer window appears, showing where the report file is located. You will see a .log file, a .grf file, and a folder bearing the same name as the .grf file. If you click the folder, you will see a group of files and folders with information about the data points, crashes, logs, and so on.
‰ Send the .grf file to Cybectec Technical Support with your request. The .grf file is, in fact, a zipped file, which contains the files and folders discussed previously.
Viewing an SMP Gateway Report File
At the time you generate a report, you can choose to see the report immediately. However, at all times, you can view an existing report for any SMP Gateway.
Proceed as follows:
‰ Select the SMP Gateway in SMP Manager ’s main window.
‰ From the Gateway menu, click Extract Report .
‰ In the Open dialog box, choose the desired .grf file and click Open .
A Windows Explorer window opens.
‰ Double-Click the folder that has the same name as the .grf file you selected.
‰ You will now see a group of files and folders. Open the desired items to view the information they contain.
28.2 Startup Problems
When you start the SMP Gateway or reset it using SMP Manager , it goes through a sequence of steps, after which you should see “Started” in the Status column of SMP Manager ’s application window. However, if the SMP Gateway’s software detects a problem during startup, you may see something else in the Status column. Here are some suggestions for troubleshooting the problem.
If the problem persists, do not hesitate to contact our technical support team.
28.2.1 No Configuration File
If the status is “No configuration file”, you have not loaded a configuration file on the
SMP Gateway.
SMP Gateway User Manual
•
249
28.2.2
Proceed as follows to correct the problem:
‰ Create a configuration file using SMP Config , if you have not already done so.
‰ Use SMP Manager to send the file to the SMP Gateway.
‰ Restart the SMP Gateway using SMP Manager , in order to activate the configuration.
Protocols Failed
If the status is “Protocols failed”, it may be due to one of the following reasons:
‰ You changed the SMP Gateway license, but did not update the SMP Gateway application.
‰ There is a problem with a master or slave protocol instance.
‰ There is an incompatibility in the settings.
Proceed as follows to correct the problem:
‰ If you have changed the SMP Gateway license without updating your SMP Gateway application:
‰ Update the SMP Gateway software using SMP Manager , as some components may be
missing. See “Updating the SMP Gateway Application”, page 224.
‰ Otherwise, start SMP Log and examine the startup log.
‰ Make sure you are using the correct configuration file:
‰ If you are using the wrong configuration file, use SMP Manager to send the correct file to the SMP Gateway.
‰ If you are using the correct configuration file, but it contains errors, fix them all using SMP Config , and then send the file to the SMP Gateway using SMP
Manager .
‰
‰
Make sure you have described your hardware correctly.
For example, you may have specified the wrong SMP Gateway model in SMP Config.
Check the protocol settings.
The log will show you the startup actions of each protocol instance. You will see which one failed to load or did not start up properly. Check its parameter settings. Make sure you have associated the protocol instance with an existing serial port (the number of available ports depends on the hardware configuration settings).
‰ Check the software’s version numbers.
A component may not be up-to-date:
‰ Send an updated version of the SMP Gateway application to the SMP Gateway, using SMP Manager .
‰ If the application update does not work, you probably need to have SMP Config convert your configuration file, after which you can send the file to the
SMP Gateway.
250
•
SMP Gateway User Manual
28.2.3
‰ If the problem persists after the SMP Gateway has restarted, try using a reduced version of the configuration file, in an attempt to isolate the problem. For example, use a configuration file that has only one device and one protocol instance.
Critical Components Missing
If the status is “Critical components missing”, there is a missing component in the SMP Gateway application. This situation can arise if you change your license without updating the SMP Gateway application.
‰ Update the SMP Gateway application using SMP Manager
SMP Gateway Application”, page 224.
‰ If the problem persists, contact Cybectec Technical Support.
28.3 Communications Problems
Communications problems always occur in one of the following layers:
SMP DEVICE
Protocol Protocol
Link Link
Physical Physical
SMP Trace
and
SMP Stats
are the ideal tools for you to troubleshoot a communications problem and determine in which layer the problem occurred. SMP Trace shows you the information that was sent back and forth between the SMP Gateway and the device, while SMP Stats supplies you with statistics that can help you detect an anomaly. For example, the statistics may show you that there were no exchanges whatsoever on a particular link, or the trace may show you that the
SMP Gateway never got responses when it polled a particular device.
SMP Gateway User Manual
•
251
28.3.1
28.3.2
28.3.3
252
•
Physical Layer
The physical connection between the SMP Gateway and a device is often at the root of a problem.
You should therefore ask yourself the following questions:
‰ Am I using the correct type of cable?
Do I need to use a cable for RS-232 or for RS-485 communications?
Should I be using a 2-wire or a 4-wire cable for RS-485 communications?
‰ Is the device connected properly?
Make sure the cable is connected to the correct port.
‰ Do I need an adaptor?
For example, do I need a null-modem adapter for RS-232 communications?
‰ Are the TCP/IP network settings configured correctly?
Use SMP Config to check the Asynchronous Serial Ports settings, under Connections:
‰ If I’m using RS-485 4-wire, did I choose RS-422?
If I’m using RS-485 2-wire, did I choose RS-485?
Link Layer
Problems in the link layer are often related to the settings of the communications component .
Here are examples of settings that can cause problems:
‰ The baud rate, parity, start and stop bit settings of both the SMP Gateway and the device, for serial communications.
‰ The TCP/IP address and port configuration, for TCP/IP communications.
We suggest you take the following steps:
‰ Examine the link layer byte exchanges, using SMP Trace and SMP Stats .
‰ Using SMP Config , look at the Connections settings:
‰
‰
If your SMP Gateway communicates with the device over a serial link, check the communications settings of the link used to communicate with the device, such as baud rate and parity. These settings must be configured identically at both ends.
If your SMP Gateway communicates with the device over a WAN or LAN, make sure you have specified the correct TCP/IP address and port number.
Protocol Layer
Protocol problems are directly related to the settings of the protocol instance used to communicate with the device.
You should proceed as follows:
‰ Verify the configured device address.
‰ Verify the protocol version.
SMP Gateway User Manual
‰ Verify the packet size.
‰ Make sure all scanning sequences are configured.
‰ Does the device support the scanning parameters?
Different versions of the same device sometimes react differently.
We suggest you take the following steps:
‰ Examine the protocol layer byte exchanges, using SMP Trace and SMP Stats .
‰ Using SMP Config , make sure you have specified the correct protocol.
‰ Look at the
SMP Config
general settings:
‰
‰
‰
Check the settings of the protocol instance, such as packet size.
Make sure the device or link address is correct.
Check the polling parameters.
Some devices are not able to respond to rapid polling requests because they process the information very slowly. Other devices only allow slow communications links - 9600 baud or less. If you poll too quickly, the request will arrive before the last block of data is read, thereby causing communications problems.
28.4 Problems with Data Validity
When all the exchanges are taking place correctly and there are no protocol errors reported in the statistics, but some of the acquired values are erroneous or incoherent:
‰ Using SMP Config , examine the following settings for the points that are invalid:
‰ Data point address.
Is the address of the physical data point correct? Some devices have flexible configuration options, so you have to compare the SMP Config values with the values set by the device manufacturer’s software.
‰ Conversion factors.
For physical analog data points, are the scale and offset factors correct?
‰ Polarity.
For physical binary input points, Is the polarity set correctly?
‰ Warning messages.
Are there any warning messages in the message pane, regarding the data points that have erroneous values?
28.5 Problems Executing a Control Operation
When a control operation fails:
SMP Gateway User Manual
•
253
‰ Use
SMP Log
to look in the Control log.
All control operations are recorded in this log.
‰ Use SMP Trace to see the data exchanges.
Note, however, that you have to be connected to the SMP Gateway to view a control operation in real time.
‰ Make the following checks to determine the cause of the failure:
‰ Using SMP Log , look at the control log and make sure the SCADA is sending the correct sequence ( direct operate , select before operate ) of messages.
‰ Using SMP Config , check the general settings of both the master and the slave protocol instances. Make sure each that for each of them, the Control Enabled checkbox is selected.
‰ Using SMP Config , make sure the binary and analog physical output points are set up correctly. For example, for the DNP3 protocol,
Control Type
requires a value other than
“Not supported”. See the device manufacturer’s documentation for the required setup and refer to the appropriate Cooper Power Systems protocol documentation.
‰ Refer to the device manufacturer’s documentation to check whether the device allows for a polling message to be sent between a select and an operate or whether polling has to wait until after the select and operate have completed. Some manufacturers deselect the device if a polling message is sent between a select and an operate. If polling has to wait, use SMP Config to make sure that the Tx During SBO checkbox is selected in the master protocol’s general parameters.
‰ Using the web browser, make sure the point called _smp___localControl is set either to
0 to enable commands from the SCADA or to 1, to enable commands from Visual
Substation. If the value is not set properly, send either an open command to the point called
_smp___setLocalControl to set the value to 0, or a close command to set the value to 1.
‰ Using the web browser, check whether the point is set to inhibit operations. If so, remove the inhibition.
28.6 Firewall-Related Problems
If you have mistakenly enabled the firewall and cannot use VPN connections:
‰ Ask your IT administrator to modify the corporate network to allow VPN connections to the
SMP Gateway, if possible.
If your IT administrator cannot solve the problem, the only solution left is to perform a “Factory reset” of the SMP Gateway. This operation:
‰ deletes all configuration files;
‰ clears the log history;
‰ deletes the application files.
254
•
SMP Gateway User Manual
Proceed as follow:
‰ Connect your PC to the SMP Gateway’s console port using an RS-232 serial cable.
‰ Start a terminal application such as HyperTerminal. Configure the communications settings to use the serial port connected to the SMP Gateway. Set the port speed to 115,200 bps.
‰ Restart the SMP Gateway. Wait for the following prompt to appear in the terminal application’s window:
********************************************
Press ENTER now to access configuration mode
********************************************
The SMP Gateway will start in 2 seconds...
‰ Press ENTER . The following menu will appear:
Current GMT time: 2008/06/10 18:16:53
Available commands:
S Set the clock
C Configure TCP/IP parameters
U Update the firmware
F Reset the SMP Gateway configuration to the factory default
M Start the SMP Gateway in MAX SAFE MODE
W Start the SMP Gateway
Note. The SMP Gateway will start after 60 seconds if you have not pressed any
key.
>
‰ Press F to reset the SMP Gateway configuration to the factory default.
‰ Type yes to confirm your selection. The SMP Gateway will restart and the firewall should no longer be enabled on it.
SMP Gateway User Manual
•
255
Advertisement
Key features
- Gateway for substation automation
- Integrates devices and systems from different manufacturers
- Supports a variety of applications, including data acquisition, control, protection and monitoring
- Improves the reliability, efficiency and security of your substation
- Cost-effective and easy-to-use
